Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 25083:d3b7d7d2bca8
(x_setup_relief_color): Don't try smart color allocation
if display is mono.
(x_draw_row_bitmaps): If face has stipple, don't switch
to foreground color for clearing areas, and set the fill style.
author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Tue, 27 Jul 1999 00:02:50 +0000 |
parents | 583c6bc7fe82 |
children | 08ae9ffe6763 |
rev | line source |
---|---|
314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
20708 | 2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 1998 |
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
314 | 4 |
5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
6 | |
7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
314 | 10 any later version. |
11 | |
12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
16 | |
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
314 | 21 |
22 #include <signal.h> | |
4696
1fc792473491
Include <config.h> instead of "config.h".
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
4551
diff
changeset
|
23 #include <config.h> |
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
26 | |
21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
28 #include <unistd.h> | |
29 #endif | |
30 | |
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
33 #include "termopts.h" | |
2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
764 | 40 #include "frame.h" |
314 | 41 #include "window.h" |
42 #include "commands.h" | |
43 #include "disptab.h" | |
44 #include "indent.h" | |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
45 #include "intervals.h" |
15065 | 46 #include "blockinput.h" |
21514 | 47 #include "process.h" |
48 #include "keyboard.h" | |
314 | 49 |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
554 | 54 |
314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
56 #include "xterm.h" | |
25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
314 | 58 |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
25012 | 63 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
64 | |
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
65 #include "systime.h" |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
66 #include <errno.h> |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
67 |
25012 | 68 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
69 | |
70 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
71 #include <unistd.h> | |
72 #endif | |
73 | |
314 | 74 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
75 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
76 | |
77 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
25012 | 78 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
79 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
80 | |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
81 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
25012 | 82 |
83 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
84 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
85 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
86 | |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
87 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
88 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
89 #else |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
90 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
91 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #endif |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
94 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
314 | 95 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
96 #endif | |
25012 | 97 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
98 | |
99 | |
100 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
101 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
102 | |
103 struct dim | |
104 { | |
105 int width; | |
106 int height; | |
107 }; | |
108 | |
109 | |
110 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
111 | |
112 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); | |
113 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
114 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
115 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
116 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
117 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
118 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
119 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
120 struct dim)); | |
121 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
122 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
123 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
124 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
125 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
126 int, int, struct dim)); | |
127 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int)); | |
128 static void swap_glyphs_in_rows P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
129 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
130 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); | |
131 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
132 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
133 struct window *)); | |
134 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
135 struct window *)); | |
136 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
137 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
138 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
139 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
140 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
141 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
142 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
143 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
144 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
145 int, int)); | |
146 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
147 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
148 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
149 static void update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
150 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); | |
151 static void update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
152 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
153 int)); | |
154 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
155 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
156 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
157 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
158 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); | |
159 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
160 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
161 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
162 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
163 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
164 struct glyph_row *)); | |
165 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
166 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
167 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
168 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
169 | |
170 | |
171 | |
172 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
173 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
174 scrolling. */ | |
175 | |
176 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
177 |
554 | 178 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
764 | 179 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
314 | 180 |
764 | 181 int frame_garbaged; |
314 | 182 |
25012 | 183 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
314 | 184 |
185 int display_completed; | |
186 | |
25012 | 187 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
188 audible bell. */ | |
314 | 189 |
190 int visible_bell; | |
191 | |
764 | 192 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
314 | 193 |
194 int inverse_video; | |
195 | |
196 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
197 | |
198 int baud_rate; | |
199 | |
25012 | 200 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
201 is running. */ | |
314 | 202 |
203 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
204 | |
205 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
25012 | 206 |
314 | 207 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
208 | |
25012 | 209 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
210 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
314 | 211 |
212 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
25012 | 213 as a character code. |
214 | |
215 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
216 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
314 | 217 |
218 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
219 | |
220 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
221 | |
222 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
223 | |
25012 | 224 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
225 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
226 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
227 | |
314 | 228 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
229 |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
230 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table; |
25012 | 231 |
314 | 232 |
25012 | 233 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
234 variable always holds the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
235 | |
236 struct frame *selected_frame; | |
237 | |
238 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
764 | 239 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
9572 | 240 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
241 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
25012 | 242 |
243 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
244 | |
245 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
246 | |
247 FILE *termscript; | |
248 | |
249 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
250 | |
251 struct cm Wcm; | |
252 | |
253 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
254 | |
255 int delayed_size_change; | |
256 | |
257 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
258 | |
259 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
260 | |
261 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
262 | |
263 struct window *updated_window; | |
264 | |
265 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
266 | |
267 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
268 int updated_area; | |
269 | |
270 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
271 | |
272 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
273 | |
274 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
275 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
276 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
277 | |
278 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
279 | |
280 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
281 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
282 | |
283 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
284 int glyph_pool_count; | |
285 | |
286 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
287 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
288 | |
289 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
290 | |
291 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
292 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
293 | |
294 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
295 | |
296 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
297 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
298 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
299 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
300 loaded on demand. */ | |
301 | |
302 int fonts_changed_p; | |
303 | |
304 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
305 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
306 | |
307 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
308 | |
309 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
310 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
311 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
312 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
313 | |
314 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
315 | |
316 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
317 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
318 | |
319 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
320 | |
321 | |
322 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
323 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
324 address of this function is used. */ | |
314 | 325 |
326 void | |
327 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
328 char *from, *to; | |
329 int size; | |
330 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
331 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
314 | 332 return; |
333 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
334 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
335 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
336 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
337 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
338 bcopy (from, to, size); |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
339 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
340 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
341 else |
314 | 342 { |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
343 register char *endf = from + size; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
344 register char *endt = to + size; |
314 | 345 |
346 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
347 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
348 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
349 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
350 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
351 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
314 | 352 if (to - from < 64) |
353 { | |
354 do | |
355 *--endt = *--endf; | |
356 while (endf != from); | |
357 } | |
358 else | |
359 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
360 for (;;) |
314 | 361 { |
362 endt -= (to - from); | |
363 endf -= (to - from); | |
364 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
365 if (endt < to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
366 break; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
367 |
314 | 368 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
369 } | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
370 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
371 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
25012 | 372 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
373 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
314 | 374 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
375 } | |
376 } | |
377 } | |
378 | |
25012 | 379 |
380 | |
381 /*********************************************************************** | |
382 Glyph Matrices | |
383 ***********************************************************************/ | |
384 | |
385 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
386 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
387 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
388 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
389 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
390 | |
391 struct glyph_matrix * | |
392 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
393 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
394 { | |
395 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
396 | |
397 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
398 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
399 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
400 | |
401 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
402 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
403 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
404 | |
405 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
406 result->pool = pool; | |
407 return result; | |
408 } | |
409 | |
410 | |
411 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
412 | |
413 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
414 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
415 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
416 pointer was passed to this function. | |
417 | |
418 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
419 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
420 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
421 | |
422 static void | |
423 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
424 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
425 { | |
426 if (matrix) | |
427 { | |
428 int i; | |
429 | |
430 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
431 allocated. */ | |
432 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
433 abort (); | |
434 | |
435 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
436 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
437 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
438 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
439 | |
440 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
441 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
442 xfree (matrix); | |
443 } | |
444 } | |
445 | |
446 | |
447 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
448 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
449 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
450 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
451 or a float. */ | |
452 | |
453 static int | |
454 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
455 struct window *w; | |
456 int total_glyphs; | |
457 Lisp_Object margin; | |
458 { | |
459 int n; | |
460 | |
461 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
462 { | |
463 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
464 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
465 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
466 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
467 } | |
468 else | |
469 n = 0; | |
470 | |
471 return n; | |
472 } | |
473 | |
474 | |
475 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
476 window sizes. | |
477 | |
478 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
479 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
480 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
481 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
482 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
483 | |
484 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
485 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
486 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
487 MATRIX->pool. | |
488 | |
489 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
490 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
491 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
492 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
493 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
494 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
495 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
496 | |
497 static void | |
498 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
499 struct window *w; | |
500 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
501 int x, y; | |
502 struct dim dim; | |
503 { | |
504 int i; | |
505 int new_rows; | |
506 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
507 int top_line_changed_p = 0; | |
508 int top_line_p = 0; | |
509 int left = -1, right = -1; | |
510 int window_x, window_y, window_width, window_height; | |
511 | |
512 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
513 if (w) | |
514 { | |
515 top_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_TOP_LINE_P (w); | |
516 top_line_changed_p = top_line_p != matrix->top_line_p; | |
517 } | |
518 matrix->top_line_p = top_line_p; | |
519 | |
520 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
521 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
522 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
523 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
524 { | |
525 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
526 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
527 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
528 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
529 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
530 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
531 | |
532 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
533 && !fonts_changed_p | |
534 && !top_line_changed_p | |
535 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
536 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
537 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
538 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
539 return; | |
540 } | |
541 | |
542 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
543 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
544 { | |
545 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
546 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
547 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
548 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
549 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
550 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
551 } | |
552 else | |
553 new_rows = 0; | |
554 | |
555 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
556 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
557 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
558 if (matrix->pool) | |
559 { | |
560 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
561 | |
562 if (w) | |
563 { | |
564 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
565 w->left_margin_width); | |
566 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
567 w->right_margin_width); | |
568 } | |
569 else | |
570 left = right = 0; | |
571 | |
572 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
573 { | |
574 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
575 | |
576 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
577 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
578 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
579 + x); | |
580 | |
581 if (w == NULL | |
582 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
583 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->top_line_p)) | |
584 { | |
585 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
586 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
587 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
588 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
589 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
590 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
591 } | |
592 else | |
593 { | |
594 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
595 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
596 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
597 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
598 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
599 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
600 } | |
601 } | |
602 | |
603 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
604 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
605 } | |
606 else | |
607 { | |
608 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
609 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
610 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
611 || new_rows | |
612 || top_line_changed_p | |
613 || marginal_areas_changed_p) | |
614 { | |
615 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
616 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
617 | |
618 while (row < end) | |
619 { | |
620 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
621 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
622 (dim.width | |
623 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
624 | |
625 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
626 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
627 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->top_line_p)) | |
628 { | |
629 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
630 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
631 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
632 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
633 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
634 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
635 } | |
636 else | |
637 { | |
638 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
639 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
640 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
641 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
642 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
643 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
644 } | |
645 ++row; | |
646 } | |
647 } | |
648 | |
649 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
650 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
651 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
652 } | |
653 | |
654 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
655 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
656 | |
657 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
658 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
659 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
660 when this function runs. */ | |
661 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
662 { | |
663 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, | |
664 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
665 of the window. */ | |
666 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
667 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
668 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
669 { | |
670 i = 0; | |
671 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
672 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
673 < matrix->window_height)) | |
674 ++i; | |
675 | |
676 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
677 are invalidated. */ | |
678 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
679 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
680 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
681 | |
682 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
683 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
684 } | |
685 else | |
686 { | |
687 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
688 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
689 } | |
690 } | |
691 | |
692 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
693 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
694 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
695 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
696 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
697 | |
698 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
699 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
700 if (w) | |
701 { | |
702 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); | |
703 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
704 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
705 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
706 } | |
707 } | |
708 | |
709 | |
710 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
711 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
712 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
713 below). */ | |
314 | 714 |
715 static void | |
25012 | 716 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
717 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
718 int start, end; | |
314 | 719 { |
25012 | 720 int i, j; |
721 | |
722 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
723 { | |
724 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
725 initialization. */ | |
726 struct glyph_row temp; | |
727 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
728 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
729 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
730 } | |
314 | 731 } |
732 | |
25012 | 733 |
734 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
735 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
736 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
737 row structures are moved around). | |
738 | |
739 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
740 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
741 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
742 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
743 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
744 rotating right. */ | |
745 | |
746 void | |
747 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
748 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
749 int first, last, by; | |
314 | 750 { |
25012 | 751 if (by < 0) |
752 { | |
753 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
754 by = -by; | |
755 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
756 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
757 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
758 } | |
759 else if (by > 0) | |
314 | 760 { |
25012 | 761 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
762 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
763 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
764 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
314 | 765 } |
25012 | 766 } |
767 | |
768 | |
769 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
770 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
771 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
772 | |
773 void | |
774 increment_glyph_matrix_buffer_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, | |
775 delta_bytes) | |
776 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
777 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
778 { | |
779 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
780 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
781 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
782 xassert (start <= end); | |
783 | |
784 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
785 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (matrix->rows + start, | |
786 delta, delta_bytes); | |
787 } | |
788 | |
789 | |
790 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
791 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
792 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
793 | |
794 void | |
795 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
796 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
797 int start, end; | |
798 int enabled_p; | |
799 { | |
800 xassert (start <= end); | |
801 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
802 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
803 | |
804 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
805 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
806 } | |
807 | |
808 | |
809 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
810 | |
811 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
812 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
813 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
814 enabled_p flag. | |
815 | |
816 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
817 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
818 | |
819 void | |
820 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
821 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
822 { | |
823 if (matrix) | |
314 | 824 { |
25012 | 825 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
826 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
314 | 827 } |
828 } | |
25012 | 829 |
830 | |
831 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
832 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
833 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
834 | |
835 void | |
836 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
837 struct window *w; | |
838 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
839 int start, end, dy; | |
840 { | |
841 int min_y, max_y; | |
842 | |
843 xassert (start <= end); | |
844 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
845 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
846 | |
847 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_TOP_LINE_HEIGHT (w); | |
848 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); | |
849 | |
850 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
851 { | |
852 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
853 | |
854 row->y += dy; | |
855 | |
856 if (row->y < min_y) | |
857 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
858 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
859 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
860 else | |
861 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
862 } | |
863 } | |
864 | |
865 | |
866 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
867 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
868 current matrix. */ | |
869 | |
870 void | |
871 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
872 register struct frame *f; | |
873 { | |
874 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
875 if (f->current_matrix) | |
876 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
877 | |
878 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
879 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
880 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
881 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
882 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
883 | |
884 /* Clear the matrix of the toolbar window, if any. */ | |
885 if (WINDOWP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
886 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window)->current_matrix); | |
887 | |
888 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
889 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
890 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
891 } | |
892 | |
893 | |
894 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
314 | 895 |
21514 | 896 void |
25012 | 897 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
898 register struct frame *f; | |
314 | 899 { |
25012 | 900 if (f->desired_matrix) |
901 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
902 | |
903 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
904 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
905 | |
906 if (WINDOWP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
907 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
908 | |
909 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
910 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
911 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
912 } | |
913 | |
914 | |
915 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
916 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
917 | |
918 static void | |
919 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
920 struct window *w; | |
921 int desired_p; | |
922 { | |
923 while (w) | |
314 | 924 { |
25012 | 925 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
926 { | |
927 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
928 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
929 } | |
930 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
314 | 931 { |
25012 | 932 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
933 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
934 } | |
935 else | |
936 { | |
937 if (desired_p) | |
938 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
939 else | |
314 | 940 { |
25012 | 941 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
942 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
314 | 943 } |
25012 | 944 } |
945 | |
946 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
947 } | |
948 } | |
949 | |
950 | |
951 | |
952 /*********************************************************************** | |
953 Glyph Rows | |
954 | |
955 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
956 ***********************************************************************/ | |
957 | |
958 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
959 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
960 structure members. */ | |
961 | |
962 void | |
963 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
964 struct glyph_row *row; | |
965 { | |
966 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
967 static struct glyph_row null_row; | |
968 | |
969 /* Save pointers. */ | |
970 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
971 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
972 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
973 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
974 | |
975 /* Clear. */ | |
976 *row = null_row; | |
977 | |
978 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
979 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
980 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
981 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
982 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
983 } | |
984 | |
985 | |
986 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
987 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
988 | |
989 void | |
990 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
991 struct window *w; | |
992 struct glyph_row *row; | |
993 int y; | |
994 { | |
995 int min_y, max_y; | |
996 | |
997 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_TOP_LINE_HEIGHT (w); | |
998 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); | |
999 | |
1000 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1001 row->y = y; | |
1002 row->ascent = 0; | |
1003 row->height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w))); | |
1004 | |
1005 if (row->y < min_y) | |
1006 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
1007 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
1008 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
1009 else | |
1010 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
1011 | |
1012 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1013 } | |
1014 | |
1015 | |
1016 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
1017 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
1018 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
1019 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
1020 ends. */ | |
1021 | |
1022 void | |
1023 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1024 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1025 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1026 { | |
1027 int area, i; | |
1028 | |
1029 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
1030 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1031 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1032 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1033 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1034 | |
1035 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
1036 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1037 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
1038 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
1039 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
1040 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
1041 | |
1042 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
1043 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
1044 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1045 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
1046 } | |
1047 | |
1048 | |
1049 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph | |
1050 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
1051 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
1052 | |
1053 static void | |
1054 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
1055 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1056 { | |
1057 int area; | |
1058 | |
1059 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1060 { | |
1061 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
1062 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
1063 | |
1064 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1065 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1066 | |
1067 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1068 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
1069 | |
1070 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
1071 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1072 | |
1073 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
1074 { | |
1075 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
1076 initialization. */ | |
1077 struct glyph temp; | |
1078 temp = *glyph_a; | |
1079 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
1080 *glyph_b = temp; | |
1081 ++glyph_a; | |
1082 ++glyph_b; | |
314 | 1083 } |
1084 } | |
1085 } | |
25012 | 1086 |
1087 | |
1088 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
1089 | |
1090 static INLINE void | |
1091 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
1092 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1093 { | |
1094 int i; | |
1095 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
1096 { | |
1097 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
1098 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
1099 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
1100 } | |
1101 } | |
1102 | |
1103 | |
1104 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
1105 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
1106 | |
1107 INLINE void | |
1108 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
1109 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1110 { | |
1111 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
1112 | |
1113 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
1114 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1115 | |
1116 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
1117 *to = *from; | |
1118 | |
1119 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
1120 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1121 } | |
1122 | |
1123 | |
1124 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
1125 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
1126 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
1127 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
1128 | |
1129 void | |
1130 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1131 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1132 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1133 { | |
1134 int area; | |
1135 | |
1136 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
1137 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
1138 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1139 | |
1140 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
1141 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1142 if (from->used[area]) | |
1143 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
1144 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
1145 | |
1146 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
1147 increment_glyph_row_buffer_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); | |
1148 } | |
1149 | |
1150 | |
1151 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
1152 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
1153 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
1154 a memory leak. */ | |
1155 | |
1156 static INLINE void | |
1157 assign_row (to, from) | |
1158 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1159 { | |
1160 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
1161 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1162 } | |
1163 | |
1164 | |
1165 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
1166 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
1167 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
1168 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
1169 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
1170 | |
1171 static int | |
1172 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
1173 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
1174 { | |
1175 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1176 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1177 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
1178 | |
1179 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
1180 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
1181 } | |
1182 | |
1183 | |
1184 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice | |
1185 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
1186 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
1187 | |
1188 static struct glyph_row * | |
1189 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
1190 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
1191 int row; | |
1192 { | |
1193 int i; | |
1194 | |
1195 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
1196 | |
1197 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1198 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
1199 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
1200 break; | |
1201 | |
1202 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
1203 } | |
1204 | |
1205 | |
1206 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
1207 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
1208 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
1209 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
1210 | |
1211 void | |
1212 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
1213 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1214 { | |
1215 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
1216 { | |
1217 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1218 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1219 } | |
1220 } | |
1221 | |
1222 | |
1223 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
1224 | |
1225 int | |
1226 line_hash_code (row) | |
1227 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1228 { | |
1229 int hash = 0; | |
1230 | |
1231 if (row->enabled_p) | |
1232 { | |
1233 if (row->inverse_p) | |
1234 { | |
1235 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
1236 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
1237 hash = -1; | |
1238 } | |
1239 else | |
1240 { | |
1241 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1242 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1243 | |
1244 while (glyph < end) | |
1245 { | |
1246 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*glyph); | |
1247 if (must_write_spaces) | |
1248 g -= SPACEGLYPH; | |
1249 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + g; | |
1250 ++glyph; | |
1251 } | |
1252 | |
1253 if (hash == 0) | |
1254 hash = 1; | |
1255 } | |
1256 } | |
1257 | |
1258 return hash; | |
1259 } | |
1260 | |
1261 | |
1262 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
1263 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
1264 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
1265 | |
1266 static unsigned int | |
1267 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
1268 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1269 int vpos; | |
1270 { | |
1271 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
1272 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1273 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1274 int len; | |
1275 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
1276 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
1277 | |
1278 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
1279 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
1280 { | |
1281 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
1282 while (end != beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*end)) | |
1283 --end; | |
1284 | |
1285 /* All blank line. */ | |
1286 if (end == beg) | |
1287 return 0; | |
1288 | |
1289 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
1290 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
1291 ++beg; | |
1292 } | |
1293 | |
1294 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
1295 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
1296 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
1297 len = end - beg; | |
1298 else | |
1299 { | |
1300 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
1301 in LEN. */ | |
1302 len = 0; | |
1303 while (beg < end) | |
1304 { | |
1305 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
1306 | |
1307 if (GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) | |
1308 len += 1; | |
1309 else | |
1310 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
1311 | |
1312 ++beg; | |
1313 } | |
1314 } | |
1315 | |
1316 return len; | |
1317 } | |
1318 | |
1319 | |
1320 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
1321 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
1322 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
1323 visibility. */ | |
1324 | |
1325 static INLINE int | |
1326 row_equal_p (w, a, b) | |
1327 struct window *w; | |
1328 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1329 { | |
1330 if (a == b) | |
1331 return 1; | |
1332 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
1333 return 0; | |
1334 else | |
1335 { | |
1336 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
1337 int area; | |
1338 | |
1339 /* Compare glyphs. */ | |
1340 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1341 { | |
1342 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
1343 return 0; | |
1344 | |
1345 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1346 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
1347 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1348 | |
1349 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
1350 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
1351 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
1352 | |
1353 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
1354 return 0; | |
1355 } | |
1356 | |
1357 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
1358 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
1359 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
1360 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
1361 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
1362 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
1363 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
1364 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) | |
1365 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
1366 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
1367 || a->x != b->x | |
1368 /* Different height. */ | |
1369 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
1370 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) | |
1371 return 0; | |
1372 } | |
1373 | |
1374 return 1; | |
1375 } | |
1376 | |
1377 | |
314 | 1378 |
25012 | 1379 /*********************************************************************** |
1380 Glyph Pool | |
1381 | |
1382 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
1383 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1384 | |
1385 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
1386 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1387 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
1388 | |
1389 static struct glyph_pool * | |
1390 new_glyph_pool () | |
1391 { | |
1392 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
1393 | |
1394 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
1395 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
1396 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
1397 | |
1398 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
1399 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
1400 | |
1401 return result; | |
1402 } | |
1403 | |
1404 | |
1405 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
1406 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1407 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
1408 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
1409 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
1410 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
1411 | |
1412 static void | |
1413 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
1414 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1415 { | |
1416 if (pool) | |
1417 { | |
1418 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
1419 --glyph_pool_count; | |
1420 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
1421 | |
1422 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
1423 xfree (pool); | |
1424 } | |
1425 } | |
1426 | |
1427 | |
1428 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
1429 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
1430 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
1431 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
1432 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
1433 | |
1434 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
1435 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
1436 | |
1437 static int | |
1438 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
1439 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1440 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1441 { | |
1442 int needed; | |
1443 int changed_p; | |
1444 | |
1445 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
1446 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
1447 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
1448 | |
1449 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
1450 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
1451 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
1452 { | |
1453 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
1454 | |
1455 if (pool->glyphs) | |
1456 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1457 else | |
1458 { | |
1459 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
1460 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1461 } | |
1462 | |
1463 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
1464 } | |
1465 | |
1466 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
1467 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
1468 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
1469 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
1470 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
1471 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
1472 | |
1473 return changed_p; | |
1474 } | |
1475 | |
1476 | |
1477 | |
1478 /*********************************************************************** | |
1479 Debug Code | |
1480 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1481 | |
1482 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
1483 | |
1484 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a | |
1485 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
1486 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
1487 MATRIX. */ | |
1488 | |
1489 void | |
1490 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
1491 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1492 { | |
1493 int i, j; | |
1494 | |
1495 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1496 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
1497 xassert (i == j | |
1498 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
1499 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
1500 } | |
1501 | |
1502 | |
1503 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
1504 | |
1505 struct glyph_row * | |
1506 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
1507 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1508 int row; | |
1509 { | |
1510 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
1511 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
1512 | |
1513 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
1514 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
1515 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
314 | 1516 #if 0 |
25012 | 1517 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
1518 #endif | |
1519 | |
1520 return matrix->rows + row; | |
1521 } | |
1522 | |
1523 | |
1524 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
1525 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
1526 nevertheless. */ | |
1527 | |
1528 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
1529 window W. */ | |
1530 | |
1531 static void | |
1532 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
314 | 1533 struct window *w; |
1534 { | |
25012 | 1535 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
1536 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
1537 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
1538 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
1539 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
1540 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
1541 int c; | |
1542 | |
1543 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
1544 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
1545 return; | |
1546 | |
1547 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
1548 | |
1549 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
1550 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
1551 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
1552 { | |
1553 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
1554 | |
1555 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1556 last_text_row = row; | |
1557 | |
1558 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
1559 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1560 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1561 | |
1562 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
1563 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
1564 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
1565 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
1566 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1567 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1568 | |
1569 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
1570 of next row. */ | |
1571 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
1572 { | |
1573 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
1574 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
1575 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1576 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
1577 } | |
1578 row = next; | |
1579 } | |
1580 | |
1581 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
1582 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
1583 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
1584 } | |
1585 | |
1586 #endif /* 0 */ | |
1587 | |
1588 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
1589 | |
1590 | |
1591 | |
1592 /********************************************************************** | |
1593 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
1594 **********************************************************************/ | |
1595 | |
1596 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
1597 redisplay | |
1598 | |
1599 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
1600 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
1601 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
1602 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
1603 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
1604 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
1605 performed. | |
1606 | |
1607 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
1608 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
1609 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
1610 | |
1611 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
1612 | |
1613 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
1614 glyph matrices yet, and | |
1615 | |
1616 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
1617 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
1618 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
1619 | |
1620 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
1621 function. | |
1622 | |
1623 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
1624 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
1625 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
1626 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
1627 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
1628 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
1629 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
1630 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
1631 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
1632 | |
1633 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
1634 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
1635 necessary. | |
1636 | |
1637 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
1638 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
1639 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
1640 windows in the sequence. | |
1641 | |
1642 |<------- result width ------->| | |
1643 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
1644 | | | | | | |
1645 | | | | | |
1646 +---------+ | | result height | |
1647 | +---------+ | |
1648 | | | | |
1649 +----------+ --- | |
1650 | |
1651 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
1652 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
1653 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
1654 | |
1655 |<---- result width -->| | |
1656 +---------+ --- | |
1657 | | | | |
1658 | | | | |
1659 +---------+--+ | | |
1660 | | | | |
1661 | | result height | |
1662 | | | |
1663 +------------+---------+ | | |
1664 | | | | |
1665 | | | | |
1666 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
1667 | |
1668 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
1669 allocated. */ | |
1670 | |
1671 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
1672 | |
1673 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
1674 size. */ | |
1675 | |
1676 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
1677 | |
1678 static struct dim | |
1679 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1680 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
1681 Lisp_Object window; | |
1682 int x, y; | |
1683 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1684 int dim_only_p; | |
1685 int *window_change_flags; | |
1686 { | |
1687 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
1688 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
1689 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
1690 struct dim total; | |
1691 struct dim dim; | |
1692 struct window *w; | |
1693 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
1694 | |
1695 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
1696 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
1697 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
1698 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
1699 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
1700 vertically below other windows. */ | |
1701 in_horz_combination_p | |
1702 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
1703 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
1704 | |
1705 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
1706 do | |
1707 { | |
1708 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
1709 | |
1710 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
1711 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
1712 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1713 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1714 dim_only_p, | |
1715 window_change_flags); | |
1716 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
1717 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1718 dim_only_p, | |
1719 window_change_flags); | |
1720 else | |
1721 { | |
1722 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
1723 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1724 { | |
1725 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1726 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1727 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1728 } | |
1729 | |
1730 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
1731 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
1732 dim.width = w->width; | |
1733 dim.height = w->height; | |
1734 | |
1735 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
1736 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
1737 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
1738 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
1739 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
1740 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1741 w->right_margin_width) | |
1742 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
1743 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1744 w->left_margin_width) | |
1745 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
1746 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1747 | |
1748 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
1749 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
1750 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
1751 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
1752 necessary. */ | |
1753 if (!dim_only_p) | |
1754 { | |
1755 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1756 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1757 } | |
1758 } | |
1759 | |
1760 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
1761 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
1762 below W. */ | |
1763 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1764 x += dim.width; | |
1765 else | |
1766 y += dim.height; | |
1767 | |
1768 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
1769 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
1770 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
1771 | |
1772 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
1773 window = w->next; | |
1774 } | |
1775 while (!NILP (window)); | |
1776 | |
1777 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
1778 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
1779 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
1780 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
1781 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
1782 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
1783 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1784 { | |
1785 total.width = x - x0; | |
1786 total.height = hmax; | |
1787 } | |
1788 else | |
1789 { | |
1790 total.width = wmax; | |
1791 total.height = y - y0; | |
1792 } | |
1793 | |
1794 return total; | |
1795 } | |
1796 | |
1797 | |
1798 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
1799 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
1800 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
1801 | |
1802 static void | |
1803 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
1804 struct window *w; | |
1805 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1806 { | |
1807 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
1808 | |
1809 while (w) | |
314 | 1810 { |
25012 | 1811 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
1812 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
1813 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1814 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
1815 else | |
314 | 1816 { |
25012 | 1817 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
1818 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
1819 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
1820 struct dim dim; | |
1821 | |
1822 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
1823 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
314 | 1824 { |
25012 | 1825 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
1826 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
314 | 1827 } |
25012 | 1828 |
1829 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
1830 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
1831 / ch_dim.width) | |
1832 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
1833 + 2 | |
1834 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
1835 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
1836 + 1 + 1); | |
1837 | |
1838 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
1839 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
1840 / ch_dim.height) | |
1841 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
1842 bottom of the window. */ | |
1843 + 2 | |
1844 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
1845 + 2); | |
1846 | |
1847 /* Change matrices. */ | |
1848 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1849 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1850 } | |
1851 | |
1852 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
1853 } | |
1854 } | |
1855 | |
1856 | |
1857 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
1858 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
1859 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
1860 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
1861 | |
1862 void | |
1863 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
1864 struct frame *f; | |
1865 { | |
1866 if (f) | |
1867 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
1868 else | |
1869 { | |
1870 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
1871 | |
1872 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
1873 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
1874 } | |
1875 } | |
1876 | |
1877 | |
1878 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
1879 | |
1880 To be called from init_display. | |
1881 | |
1882 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
1883 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
1884 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
1885 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
1886 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
1887 windows to estimated values. */ | |
1888 | |
1889 static void | |
1890 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
1891 { | |
1892 struct window *root = XWINDOW (selected_frame->root_window); | |
1893 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); | |
1894 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (selected_frame); | |
1895 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (selected_frame); | |
1896 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (selected_frame); | |
1897 | |
1898 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
1899 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
1900 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
1901 set_window_height (selected_frame->root_window, | |
1902 frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); | |
1903 | |
1904 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
1905 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
1906 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
1907 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
1908 | |
1909 adjust_frame_glyphs (selected_frame); | |
1910 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; | |
1911 } | |
1912 | |
1913 | |
1914 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
1915 | |
1916 static void | |
1917 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
1918 struct frame *f; | |
1919 { | |
1920 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
1921 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
1922 else | |
1923 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
1924 | |
1925 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
1926 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
1927 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
1928 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
1929 | |
1930 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
1931 } | |
1932 | |
1933 | |
1934 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
1935 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
1936 | |
1937 static void | |
1938 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
1939 struct frame *f; | |
1940 { | |
1941 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1942 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1943 int pool_changed_p; | |
1944 int window_change_flags; | |
1945 int top_window_y; | |
1946 | |
1947 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
1948 return; | |
1949 | |
1950 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
1951 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
1952 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
1953 | |
1954 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
1955 | |
1956 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
1957 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
1958 { | |
1959 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1960 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
1961 } | |
1962 | |
1963 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
1964 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1965 { | |
1966 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1967 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1968 } | |
1969 | |
1970 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
1971 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
1972 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
1973 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
1974 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
1975 matrix. */ | |
1976 window_change_flags = 0; | |
1977 matrix_dim | |
1978 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
1979 0, top_window_y, | |
1980 ch_dim, 1, | |
1981 &window_change_flags); | |
1982 | |
1983 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
1984 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
1985 | |
1986 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
1987 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
1988 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
1989 | |
1990 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
1991 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
1992 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
1993 { | |
1994 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
1995 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
1996 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
1997 &window_change_flags); | |
1998 | |
1999 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
2000 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
2001 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
2002 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
2003 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2004 | |
2005 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
2006 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2007 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2008 | |
2009 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
2010 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
2011 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
2012 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
2013 } | |
2014 } | |
2015 | |
2016 | |
2017 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2018 window-based redisplay. */ | |
2019 | |
2020 static void | |
2021 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
2022 struct frame *f; | |
2023 { | |
2024 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2025 struct window *w; | |
2026 | |
2027 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
2028 | |
2029 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
2030 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
2031 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
2032 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
2033 #else | |
2034 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2035 #endif | |
2036 | |
2037 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
2038 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
2039 ch_dim); | |
2040 | |
2041 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
2042 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
2043 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
2044 { | |
2045 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
2046 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2047 { | |
2048 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
2049 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2050 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2051 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2052 } | |
2053 else | |
2054 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2055 | |
2056 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
2057 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
2058 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
2059 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2060 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2061 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2062 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2063 } | |
2064 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
2065 | |
2066 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the toolbar window. If we don't | |
2067 have a toolbar window yet, make one. */ | |
2068 if (NILP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
2069 { | |
2070 f->toolbar_window = make_window (); | |
2071 w = XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window); | |
2072 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2073 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2074 } | |
2075 else | |
2076 w = XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window); | |
2077 | |
2078 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2079 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2080 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOLBAR_LINES (f)); | |
2081 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2082 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2083 } | |
2084 | |
2085 | |
2086 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
2087 | |
2088 The global variables echo_area_glyphs and previous_echo_area_glyphs | |
2089 may be pointing to the frames message buffer and must be relocated | |
2090 if the buffer is reallocated. | |
2091 | |
2092 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
2093 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
2094 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
2095 | |
2096 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
2097 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
2098 | |
2099 static void | |
2100 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
2101 struct frame *f; | |
2102 { | |
2103 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
2104 | |
2105 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
2106 { | |
2107 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
2108 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
2109 | |
2110 if (buffer == echo_area_glyphs) | |
2111 echo_area_glyphs = new_buffer; | |
2112 if (buffer == previous_echo_glyphs) | |
2113 previous_echo_glyphs = new_buffer; | |
2114 | |
2115 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
2116 } | |
2117 else | |
2118 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
2119 } | |
2120 | |
2121 | |
2122 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
2123 | |
2124 static void | |
2125 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
2126 struct frame *f; | |
2127 { | |
2128 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
2129 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
2130 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
2131 } | |
2132 | |
2133 | |
2134 | |
2135 /********************************************************************** | |
2136 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
2137 **********************************************************************/ | |
2138 | |
2139 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
2140 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
2141 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
2142 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
2143 | |
2144 void | |
2145 free_glyphs (f) | |
2146 struct frame *f; | |
2147 { | |
2148 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
2149 { | |
2150 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; | |
2151 | |
2152 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
2153 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
2154 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
2155 | |
2156 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
2157 glyph matrices. */ | |
2158 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2159 { | |
2160 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2161 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2162 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2163 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2164 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
2165 } | |
2166 | |
2167 /* Free the toolbar window and its glyph matrices. */ | |
2168 if (!NILP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
2169 { | |
2170 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window); | |
2171 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2172 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2173 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2174 f->toolbar_window = Qnil; | |
2175 } | |
2176 | |
2177 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
2178 case we are called a second time. */ | |
2179 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
2180 { | |
2181 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
2182 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
2183 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2184 } | |
2185 | |
2186 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
2187 if (f->desired_pool) | |
2188 { | |
2189 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
2190 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
2191 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
314 | 2192 } |
2193 } | |
2194 } | |
2195 | |
25012 | 2196 |
2197 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
2198 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
2199 the same tree more than once. */ | |
2200 | |
2201 void | |
2202 free_window_matrices (w) | |
2203 struct window *w; | |
2204 { | |
2205 while (w) | |
2206 { | |
2207 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2208 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2209 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2210 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2211 else | |
2212 { | |
2213 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
2214 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
2215 W. */ | |
2216 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2217 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2218 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
2219 } | |
2220 | |
2221 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2222 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2223 } | |
2224 } | |
2225 | |
2226 | |
2227 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
2228 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
2229 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
2230 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2231 |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2232 void |
25012 | 2233 check_glyph_memory () |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2234 { |
25012 | 2235 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
2236 | |
2237 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
2238 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2239 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
2240 | |
2241 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
2242 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
2243 abort (); | |
2244 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
2245 abort (); | |
2246 } | |
2247 | |
2248 | |
2249 | |
2250 /********************************************************************** | |
2251 Building a Frame Matrix | |
2252 **********************************************************************/ | |
2253 | |
2254 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
2255 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
2256 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
2257 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
2258 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
2259 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
2260 window matrices in this section. | |
2261 | |
2262 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
2263 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
2264 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
2265 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
2266 | |
2267 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2268 | desired | desired | | |
2269 | | | | |
2270 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2271 | current | | |
2272 | | | |
2273 +----------------------------------+ | |
2274 | |
2275 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
2276 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
2277 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
2278 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
2279 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
2280 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
2281 | |
2282 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
2283 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
2284 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
2285 enabled. | |
2286 | |
2287 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
2288 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
2289 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
2290 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
2291 | |
2292 This problem is solved like this: | |
2293 | |
2294 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
2295 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
2296 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
2297 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
2298 automatically. | |
2299 | |
2300 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
2301 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
2302 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
2303 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
2304 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
2305 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
2306 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
2307 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
2308 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
2309 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
2310 | |
2311 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
2312 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
2313 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
2314 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
2315 | |
2316 static void | |
2317 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
2318 struct frame *f; | |
2319 { | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2320 int i; |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2321 |
25012 | 2322 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
2323 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2324 | |
2325 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
2326 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
2327 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
2328 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
2329 | |
2330 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
2331 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
2332 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
2333 } | |
2334 | |
2335 | |
2336 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
2337 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
2338 | |
2339 static void | |
2340 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
2341 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2342 struct window *w; | |
2343 { | |
2344 while (w) | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2345 { |
25012 | 2346 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
2347 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2348 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2349 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2350 else | |
2351 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
2352 | |
2353 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2354 } |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2355 } |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2356 |
25012 | 2357 |
2358 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
2359 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
2360 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
2361 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
2362 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
2363 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
2364 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
2365 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
2366 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
2367 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
2368 | |
2369 static void | |
2370 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
2371 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2372 struct window *w; |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2373 { |
25012 | 2374 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
2375 int window_y, frame_y; | |
2376 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
2377 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
2378 | |
2379 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2380 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
2381 { | |
2382 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
2383 | |
2384 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
2385 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
2386 { | |
2387 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
2388 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2389 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2390 : '|'); | |
2391 } | |
2392 } | |
2393 else | |
2394 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
2395 | |
2396 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
2397 frame matrix. */ | |
2398 window_y = 0; | |
2399 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2400 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2401 { |
25012 | 2402 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
2403 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
2404 | |
2405 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
2406 window row. */ | |
2407 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
2408 | |
2409 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
2410 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
2411 | |
2412 if (window_matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2413 { |
25012 | 2414 /* We have to copy W's current matrix. Copy window |
2415 row to frame row. */ | |
2416 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], | |
2417 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
2418 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
2419 } | |
2420 else | |
2421 { | |
2422 /* Copy W's desired matrix. */ | |
2423 | |
2424 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent | |
2425 windows. */ | |
2426 if (right_border_glyph) | |
2427 { | |
2428 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
2429 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
2430 } | |
2431 | |
2432 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that | |
2433 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
2434 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
2435 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
2436 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
2437 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
2438 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2439 { |
25012 | 2440 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
2441 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
2442 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
2443 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
2444 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
2445 | |
2446 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
2447 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
2448 | |
2449 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
2450 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2451 } |
25012 | 2452 |
2453 /* Now, we are sure that window row window_y is a slice of | |
2454 the frame row frame_y. But, lets check that assumption. */ | |
2455 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); | |
2456 | |
2457 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because | |
2458 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
2459 } | |
2460 | |
2461 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
2462 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
2463 can be done simply. */ | |
2464 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
2465 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
2466 | |
2467 /* Or in flags. */ | |
2468 frame_row->enabled_p |= window_row->enabled_p; | |
2469 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; | |
2470 | |
2471 /* Next row. */ | |
2472 ++window_y; | |
2473 ++frame_y; | |
2474 } | |
2475 } | |
2476 | |
2477 | |
2478 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
2479 | |
2480 Each row has the form: | |
2481 | |
2482 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2483 | left | text | right | | |
2484 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2485 | |
2486 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
2487 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
2488 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
2489 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
2490 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
2491 | |
2492 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
2493 | |
2494 static void | |
2495 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
2496 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2497 { | |
2498 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2499 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
2500 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2501 } | |
2502 | |
2503 | |
2504 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
2505 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
2506 | |
2507 static void | |
2508 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
2509 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2510 int area; | |
2511 { | |
2512 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
2513 { | |
2514 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
2515 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
2516 | |
2517 while (text < end) | |
2518 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
2519 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
2520 } | |
2521 } | |
2522 | |
2523 | |
2524 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
2525 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
2526 | |
2527 static void | |
2528 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
2529 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2530 int upto; | |
2531 { | |
2532 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2533 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2534 | |
2535 while (i < upto) | |
2536 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
2537 | |
2538 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
2539 } | |
2540 | |
2541 | |
2542 | |
2543 /********************************************************************** | |
2544 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
2545 **********************************************************************/ | |
2546 | |
2547 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
2548 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
2549 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
2550 | |
2551 static INLINE void | |
2552 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
2553 struct frame *f; | |
2554 { | |
2555 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
2556 } | |
2557 | |
2558 | |
2559 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
2560 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
2561 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
2562 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
2563 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
2564 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
2565 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
2566 | |
2567 static INLINE void | |
2568 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
2569 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
2570 int row; | |
2571 { | |
2572 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
2573 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
2574 | |
2575 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
2576 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
2577 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2578 | |
2579 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
2580 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
2581 | |
2582 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
2583 for window matrices. */ | |
2584 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2585 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
2586 } | |
2587 | |
2588 | |
2589 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
2590 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
2591 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
2592 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
2593 | |
2594 static void | |
2595 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
2596 struct window *w; | |
2597 int frame_row; | |
2598 { | |
2599 while (w) | |
2600 { | |
2601 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2602 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
2603 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2604 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
2605 else | |
2606 { | |
2607 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
2608 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
2609 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
2610 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2611 | |
2612 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
2613 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
2614 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2615 { |
25012 | 2616 struct glyph_row *current_row |
2617 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
2618 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
2619 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
2620 | |
2621 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2622 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2623 } |
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2624 } |
25012 | 2625 |
2626 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2627 } |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2628 } |
25012 | 2629 |
2630 | |
2631 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
2632 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
2633 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
2634 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
2635 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
2636 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
2637 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
2638 | |
2639 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
2640 | |
2641 void | |
2642 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
2643 retained_p) | |
2644 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2645 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2646 int *copy_from; | |
2647 char *retained_p; | |
2648 { | |
2649 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
2650 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2651 | |
2652 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
2653 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
2654 | |
2655 int i; | |
2656 | |
2657 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
2658 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2659 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2660 | |
2661 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
2662 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2663 { | |
2664 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
2665 | |
2666 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
2667 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
2668 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
2669 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2670 | |
2671 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
2672 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2673 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
2674 } | |
2675 | |
2676 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
2677 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2678 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
2679 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2680 } | |
2681 | |
2682 | |
2683 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after | |
2684 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
2685 | |
2686 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
2687 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
2688 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
2689 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
2690 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
2691 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
2692 which is empty. */ | |
2693 | |
2694 static void | |
2695 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
2696 struct window *w; | |
2697 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2698 int *copy_from; | |
2699 char *retained_p; | |
2700 { | |
2701 while (w) | |
2702 { | |
2703 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2704 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2705 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2706 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2707 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2708 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2709 else | |
2710 { | |
2711 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
2712 matrix m. */ | |
2713 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
2714 | |
2715 int i; | |
2716 | |
2717 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2718 | |
2719 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
2720 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2721 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2722 | |
2723 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2724 { | |
2725 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
2726 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
2727 | |
2728 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
2729 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
2730 | |
2731 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
2732 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
2733 | |
2734 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
2735 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
2736 | |
2737 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
2738 int from_inside_window_p | |
2739 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
2740 | |
2741 if (from_inside_window_p) | |
2742 { | |
2743 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2744 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ | |
2745 int to_inside_window_p | |
2746 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; | |
2747 #endif | |
2748 | |
2749 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
2750 int enabled_before_p; | |
2751 | |
2752 /* If not both lines inside the window, we have a | |
2753 serious problem. */ | |
2754 xassert (to_inside_window_p); | |
2755 | |
2756 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
2757 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
2758 that. */ | |
2759 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
2760 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
2761 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2762 | |
2763 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
2764 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2765 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
2766 } | |
2767 } | |
2768 | |
2769 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
2770 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
2771 } | |
2772 | |
2773 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2774 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2775 } | |
2776 } | |
2777 | |
2778 | |
2779 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2780 | |
2781 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
2782 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
2783 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
2784 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
2785 glyph pointers. */ | |
314 | 2786 |
21514 | 2787 void |
25012 | 2788 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
314 | 2789 struct window *w; |
2790 { | |
25012 | 2791 while (w) |
2792 { | |
2793 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2794 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2795 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2796 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2797 else | |
2798 { | |
2799 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2800 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
2801 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
2802 } | |
2803 | |
2804 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2805 } | |
2806 } | |
2807 | |
2808 | |
2809 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
2810 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
2811 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
2812 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
2813 | |
2814 static void | |
2815 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
2816 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
2817 { | |
2818 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
2819 int i = 0; | |
2820 | |
2821 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2822 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2823 | |
2824 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
2825 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
2826 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
2827 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
2828 { | |
2829 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
2830 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
2831 abort (); | |
2832 ++i, ++j; | |
2833 } | |
2834 } | |
2835 | |
2836 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
2837 | |
2838 | |
2839 | |
2840 /********************************************************************** | |
2841 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
2842 **********************************************************************/ | |
2843 | |
2844 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2845 | |
2846 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
2847 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2848 | |
2849 static int | |
2850 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
2851 struct window *w; | |
2852 int vpos; | |
2853 { | |
2854 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2855 | |
2856 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2857 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
2858 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
2859 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2860 return vpos; | |
2861 } | |
2862 | |
2863 | |
2864 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
2865 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
2866 | |
2867 static int | |
2868 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
2869 struct window *w; | |
2870 int hpos; | |
2871 { | |
2872 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2873 | |
2874 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2875 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
2876 return hpos; | |
314 | 2877 } |
25012 | 2878 |
2879 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
2880 | |
2881 | |
314 | 2882 |
25012 | 2883 /********************************************************************** |
2884 Redrawing Frames | |
2885 **********************************************************************/ | |
2886 | |
2887 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
2888 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
2889 (frame) | |
2890 Lisp_Object frame; | |
2891 { | |
2892 struct frame *f; | |
2893 | |
2894 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
2895 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
2896 | |
2897 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
2898 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
2899 called so early here). */ | |
2900 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
2901 return Qnil; | |
2902 | |
2903 update_begin (f); | |
2904 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
2905 set_terminal_modes (); | |
2906 clear_frame (); | |
2907 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
2908 update_end (f); | |
2909 fflush (stdout); | |
2910 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
2911 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
2912 its redisplay done. */ | |
2913 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
2914 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
2915 f->garbaged = 0; | |
2916 return Qnil; | |
2917 } | |
2918 | |
2919 | |
2920 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
2921 function redraw-frame. */ | |
2922 | |
2923 void | |
2924 redraw_frame (f) | |
2925 struct frame *f; | |
2926 { | |
2927 Lisp_Object frame; | |
2928 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
2929 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
2930 } | |
2931 | |
2932 | |
2933 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
2934 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
2935 () | |
2936 { | |
2937 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
2938 | |
2939 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2940 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
2941 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
2942 | |
2943 return Qnil; | |
2944 } | |
2945 | |
2946 | |
2947 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
2948 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
2949 | |
2950 void | |
2951 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
2952 { | |
2953 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
2954 | |
2955 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2956 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
2957 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
2958 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
2959 } | |
2960 | |
2961 | |
2962 | |
2963 /*********************************************************************** | |
2964 Direct Operations | |
2965 ***********************************************************************/ | |
2966 | |
2967 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
2968 | |
2969 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
2970 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
2971 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
2972 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
2973 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
2974 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
2975 | |
2976 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
2977 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
2978 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
2979 for details where this function is called. */ | |
314 | 2980 |
2981 int | |
2982 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
2983 int g; | |
2984 { | |
25012 | 2985 register struct frame *f = selected_frame; |
2986 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); | |
2987 struct it it, it2; | |
2988 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
2989 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
2990 int n; | |
2991 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
2992 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
2993 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
2994 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
2995 int added_width; | |
2996 struct text_pos pos; | |
2997 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
2998 | |
2999 /* Not done directly. */ | |
3000 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
3001 | |
3002 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
3003 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
3004 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
3005 || fonts_changed_p | |
3006 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3007 || face_change_count | |
3008 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
314 | 3009 || !display_completed |
25012 | 3010 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
314 | 3011 || buffer_shared > 1 |
25012 | 3012 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
3013 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) | |
3014 && (echo_area_glyphs || STRINGP (echo_area_message))) | |
3015 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt | |
3016 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
3017 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
3018 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
3019 || (overwrite_p | |
3020 && PT != ZV | |
3021 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
3022 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
3023 || g == '\t' | |
3024 || g == '\n' | |
3025 || g == '\r' | |
3026 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
3027 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
3028 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation lines | |
3029 will change. */ | |
3030 || MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos)->continued_p | |
3031 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames | |
3032 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
3033 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
3034 return 0; | |
3035 | |
3036 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
3037 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
3038 position. */ | |
3039 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
3040 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
3041 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos); | |
3042 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, | |
3043 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
3044 | |
3045 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3046 | |
3047 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
3048 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
3049 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
3050 if (it.show_trailing_whitespace_p | |
3051 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3052 { | |
3053 struct glyph *last; | |
3054 | |
3055 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
3056 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
3057 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
3058 && last->u.ch.code == ' ')) | |
3059 return 0; | |
3060 } | |
3061 | |
3062 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
3063 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
3064 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
3065 return 0; | |
3066 | |
3067 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3068 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3069 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
3070 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
3071 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
3072 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
3073 | |
3074 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
3075 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
3076 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
3077 combination of both. */ | |
3078 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
3079 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
3080 { | |
3081 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
3082 | |
3083 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
3084 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
3085 return 0; | |
3086 | |
3087 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
3088 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
3089 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
3090 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
3091 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) | |
3092 return 0; | |
3093 | |
3094 delta += 1; | |
3095 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
3096 set_iterator_to_next (&it); | |
3097 } | |
3098 | |
3099 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
3100 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
3101 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
3102 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
314 | 3103 return 0; |
3104 | |
25012 | 3105 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
3106 it2 = it; | |
3107 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
3108 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
3109 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
3110 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
3111 { | |
3112 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
3113 return 0; | |
3114 set_iterator_to_next (&it2); | |
3115 } | |
3116 | |
3117 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
3118 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3119 | |
3120 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
3121 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
3122 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
3123 | |
3124 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
3125 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
3126 safe_bcopy (glyphs, glyphs + n, (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); | |
3127 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); | |
3128 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
3129 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3130 | |
3131 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
3132 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3133 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3134 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
3135 while (glyph < end) | |
3136 { | |
3137 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
3138 ++glyph; | |
3139 } | |
3140 | |
3141 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
3142 inserted ones. */ | |
3143 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
3144 if (glyph->charpos > 0) | |
3145 glyph->charpos += delta; | |
3146 | |
3147 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
3148 { | |
3149 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
3150 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
3151 } | |
3152 | |
3153 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
3154 increment_glyph_matrix_buffer_positions (w->current_matrix, | |
3155 w->cursor.vpos + 1, | |
3156 w->current_matrix->nrows, | |
3157 delta, delta_bytes); | |
3158 | |
3159 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3160 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
3161 | |
3162 if (it.show_trailing_whitespace_p) | |
3163 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); | |
3164 | |
3165 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
3166 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
3167 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
3168 and updated_row. */ | |
3169 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
3170 update_begin (f); | |
3171 if (rif) | |
3172 { | |
3173 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3174 | |
3175 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3176 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3177 else | |
3178 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3179 } | |
3180 else | |
3181 { | |
3182 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3183 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3184 else | |
3185 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3186 } | |
3187 | |
3188 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
3189 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
3190 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3191 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3192 | |
3193 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
3194 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
3195 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
3196 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
3197 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
3198 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3199 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3200 else | |
3201 { | |
3202 int x, y; | |
3203 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3204 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3205 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3206 : 0)); | |
3207 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3208 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3209 } | |
3210 | |
3211 if (rif) | |
3212 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
3213 update_end (f); | |
3214 updated_row = NULL; | |
3215 fflush (stdout); | |
3216 | |
3217 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
3218 | |
314 | 3219 unchanged_modified = MODIFF; |
3220 beg_unchanged = GPT - BEG; | |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3221 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3222 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3223 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3224 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
314 | 3225 |
25012 | 3226 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3227 return 1; |
3228 } | |
3229 | |
25012 | 3230 |
3231 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
3232 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
3233 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
3234 | |
314 | 3235 int |
3236 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
3237 int n; | |
3238 { | |
25012 | 3239 struct frame *f = selected_frame; |
3240 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); | |
3241 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3242 | |
3243 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3244 if (face_change_count) | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3245 return 0; |
25012 | 3246 |
3247 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
3248 displaying a message. */ | |
3249 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
3250 return 0; | |
3251 | |
3252 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
3253 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
314 | 3254 return 0; |
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3255 |
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3256 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3257 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3258 return 0; |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3259 |
25012 | 3260 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
3261 | |
3262 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
3263 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3264 return 0; |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3265 |
25012 | 3266 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
3267 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; | |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3268 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3269 |
3270 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3271 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3272 | |
3273 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3274 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3275 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3276 else | |
3277 { | |
3278 int x, y; | |
3279 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3280 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3281 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3282 : 0)); | |
3283 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3284 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3285 } | |
3286 | |
314 | 3287 fflush (stdout); |
25012 | 3288 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3289 return 1; |
3290 } | |
25012 | 3291 |
3292 | |
314 | 3293 |
25012 | 3294 /*********************************************************************** |
3295 Frame Update | |
3296 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3297 | |
3298 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
3299 | |
3300 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
3301 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
3302 scrolling. | |
3303 | |
3304 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
314 | 3305 |
3306 int | |
25012 | 3307 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
3308 struct frame *f; | |
3309 int force_p; | |
3310 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
3311 { | |
3312 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
3313 int paused_p; | |
3314 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
3315 | |
3316 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3317 { | |
3318 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
3319 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
3320 | |
3321 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
3322 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3323 | |
3324 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
3325 when pending input is detected. */ | |
3326 update_begin (f); | |
3327 | |
3328 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
3329 support. */ | |
3330 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
3331 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
3332 | |
3333 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
3334 if (WINDOWP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
3335 { | |
3336 Lisp_Object tem; | |
3337 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window); | |
3338 | |
3339 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
3340 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3341 { | |
3342 update_window (w, 1); | |
3343 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3344 | |
3345 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
3346 reuse strings. */ | |
3347 tem = f->current_toolbar_string; | |
3348 f->current_toolbar_string = f->desired_toolbar_string; | |
3349 f->desired_toolbar_string = tem; | |
3350 f->n_current_toolbar_items = f->n_desired_toolbar_items; | |
3351 | |
3352 /* Swap tool-bar items. We swap because we want to | |
3353 reuse vectors. */ | |
3354 tem = f->current_toolbar_items; | |
3355 f->current_toolbar_items = f->desired_toolbar_items; | |
3356 f->desired_toolbar_items = tem; | |
3357 } | |
3358 } | |
3359 | |
3360 | |
3361 /* Update windows. */ | |
3362 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
3363 update_end (f); | |
3364 display_completed = !paused_p; | |
3365 | |
3366 /* The flush is a performance bottleneck under X. */ | |
3367 #if 0 | |
3368 rif->flush_display (f); | |
3369 #endif | |
3370 } | |
3371 else | |
3372 { | |
3373 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
3374 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
3375 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
3376 | |
3377 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. For windows | |
3378 whose must_be_updated_p flag is set, desired matrices are | |
3379 made part of the desired frame matrix. For other windows, | |
3380 the current matrix is copied. */ | |
3381 build_frame_matrix (f); | |
3382 | |
3383 /* Do the update on the frame desired matrix. */ | |
3384 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); | |
3385 | |
3386 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ | |
3387 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
3388 } | |
3389 | |
3390 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
3391 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
3392 return paused_p; | |
3393 } | |
3394 | |
3395 | |
3396 | |
3397 /************************************************************************ | |
3398 Window-based updates | |
3399 ************************************************************************/ | |
3400 | |
3401 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
3402 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
3403 | |
3404 static int | |
3405 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
3406 struct window *w; | |
3407 int force_p; | |
3408 { | |
3409 int paused_p = 0; | |
3410 | |
3411 while (w && !paused_p) | |
3412 { | |
3413 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
3414 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
3415 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
3416 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
3417 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3418 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
3419 | |
3420 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
3421 } | |
3422 | |
3423 return paused_p; | |
3424 } | |
3425 | |
3426 | |
3427 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
3428 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
3429 | |
3430 void | |
3431 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
3432 struct window *w; | |
3433 int force_p; | |
3434 { | |
3435 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3436 { | |
3437 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3438 | |
3439 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
3440 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3441 | |
3442 /* Update W. */ | |
3443 update_begin (f); | |
3444 update_window (w, force_p); | |
3445 update_end (f); | |
3446 | |
3447 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
3448 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3449 } | |
3450 } | |
3451 | |
3452 | |
3453 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should | |
3454 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
3455 | |
3456 static int | |
3457 update_window (w, force_p) | |
3458 struct window *w; | |
3459 int force_p; | |
3460 { | |
3461 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3462 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3463 int paused_p; | |
3464 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
3465 extern int input_pending; | |
3466 extern struct frame *updating_frame; | |
3467 | |
3468 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
3469 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3470 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
3471 | |
3472 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
3473 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
3474 force_p = 1; | |
3475 else | |
3476 detect_input_pending (); | |
3477 | |
3478 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
3479 the update. */ | |
3480 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
3481 { | |
3482 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
3483 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
3484 struct glyph_row *top_line_row = NULL; | |
3485 int yb; | |
3486 | |
3487 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3488 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3489 | |
3490 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
3491 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
3492 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
3493 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
3494 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
3495 top_line_row = row++; | |
3496 | |
3497 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
3498 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
3499 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3500 { | |
3501 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
3502 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
3503 desired_matrix)); | |
3504 } | |
3505 | |
3506 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
3507 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
3508 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
3509 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
3510 ++row; | |
3511 | |
3512 /* Try reusing part of the display by inserting/deleting lines. */ | |
3513 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) | |
3514 { | |
3515 int rc = scrolling_window (w, top_line_row != NULL); | |
3516 if (rc < 0) | |
3517 { | |
3518 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
3519 paused_p = 0; | |
3520 goto set_cursor; | |
3521 } | |
3522 else if (rc > 0) | |
3523 force_p = 1; | |
3524 } | |
3525 | |
3526 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
3527 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
3528 that can be scrolled. */ | |
3529 if (top_line_row && top_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3530 { | |
3531 top_line_row->y = 0; | |
3532 update_window_line (w, 0); | |
3533 } | |
3534 | |
3535 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
3536 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
3537 if (row->enabled_p | |
3538 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired | |
3539 matrix was built with a vscroll and then | |
3540 make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts the matrix. */ | |
3541 && row->visible_height > 0) | |
3542 { | |
3543 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
3544 int i; | |
3545 | |
3546 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
3547 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
3548 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
3549 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
3550 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
3551 detect_input_pending (); | |
3552 | |
3553 update_window_line (w, vpos); | |
3554 | |
3555 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
3556 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
3557 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
3558 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
3559 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
3560 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
3561 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
3562 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
3563 in the first redisplay. */ | |
3564 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
3565 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
3566 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3567 } | |
3568 | |
3569 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
3570 paused_p = row < end; | |
3571 | |
3572 set_cursor: | |
3573 | |
3574 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) | |
3575 { | |
3576 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ | |
3577 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
3578 | |
3579 #if 0 | |
3580 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This | |
3581 is for debugging only. See the comment around | |
3582 check_matrix_invariants. */ | |
3583 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); | |
3584 #endif | |
3585 } | |
3586 | |
3587 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3588 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
3589 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
3590 #endif | |
3591 | |
3592 /* End of update of window W. */ | |
3593 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1); | |
3594 } | |
3595 else | |
3596 paused_p = 1; | |
3597 | |
3598 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
3599 return paused_p; | |
3600 } | |
3601 | |
3602 | |
3603 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
3604 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
3605 | |
3606 static void | |
3607 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
3608 struct window *w; | |
3609 int area, vpos; | |
3610 { | |
3611 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3612 | |
3613 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3614 will be relative to. */ | |
3615 updated_area = area; | |
3616 | |
3617 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
3618 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
3619 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
3620 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
3621 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
3622 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
3623 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3624 } | |
3625 | |
3626 | |
3627 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. */ | |
3628 | |
3629 static void | |
3630 update_text_area (w, vpos) | |
3631 struct window *w; | |
3632 int vpos; | |
314 | 3633 { |
25012 | 3634 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
3635 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3636 | |
3637 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3638 will be relative to. */ | |
3639 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
3640 | |
3641 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
3642 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
3643 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3644 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3645 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
3646 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height | |
3647 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) | |
3648 { | |
3649 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
3650 | |
3651 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3652 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
3653 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3654 | |
3655 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
3656 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3657 } | |
3658 else | |
3659 { | |
3660 int stop, i, x; | |
3661 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3662 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3663 | |
3664 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
3665 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
3666 extension actually takes place. */ | |
3667 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3668 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
3669 ? 1 : 0)); | |
3670 | |
3671 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
3672 i = 0; | |
3673 x = desired_row->x; | |
3674 | |
3675 while (i < stop) | |
3676 { | |
3677 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These | |
3678 don't have to be written. */ | |
3679 while (i < stop | |
3680 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) | |
3681 { | |
3682 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3683 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3684 } | |
3685 | |
3686 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx ppp | |
3687 ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row is "xxx | |
3688 ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' has not. The | |
3689 loop above will stop in front of the first `p' in the | |
3690 current row. If we would start writing glyphs there, we | |
3691 wouldn't erase the lbearing of the `p'. The rest of the | |
3692 lbearing problem is then taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ | |
3693 if (current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3694 && i > 0 | |
3695 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3696 && current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3697 { | |
3698 int left, right; | |
3699 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), | |
3700 &left, &right); | |
3701 while (left > 0 && i > 0) | |
3702 { | |
3703 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; | |
3704 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3705 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3706 } | |
3707 } | |
3708 | |
3709 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
3710 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
3711 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
3712 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
3713 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3714 { | |
3715 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
3716 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
3717 int current_x = x; | |
3718 | |
3719 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ | |
3720 while (i < stop | |
3721 && !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph) | |
3722 && x == current_x) | |
3723 { | |
3724 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3725 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
3726 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
3727 } | |
3728 | |
3729 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
3730 { | |
3731 i = start_hpos; | |
3732 x = start_x; | |
3733 desired_glyph = start; | |
3734 break; | |
3735 } | |
3736 | |
3737 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); | |
3738 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
3739 } | |
3740 } | |
3741 | |
3742 /* Write the rest. */ | |
3743 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3744 { | |
3745 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
3746 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
3747 } | |
3748 | |
3749 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
3750 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
3751 { | |
3752 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
3753 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
3754 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
3755 appropriately above. */ | |
3756 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3757 } | |
3758 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
3759 { | |
3760 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
3761 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3762 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
3763 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
3764 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3765 } | |
3766 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
3767 { | |
3768 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
3769 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
3770 int x; | |
3771 | |
3772 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3773 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
3774 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
3775 | |
3776 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
3777 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
3778 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
3779 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
3780 this way. */ | |
3781 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
3782 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3783 { | |
3784 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
3785 x = -1; | |
3786 } | |
3787 else | |
3788 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
3789 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
3790 } | |
3791 } | |
3792 } | |
3793 | |
3794 | |
3795 /* Update row VPOS in window W. */ | |
3796 | |
3797 static void | |
3798 update_window_line (w, vpos) | |
3799 struct window *w; | |
3800 int vpos; | |
3801 { | |
3802 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
3803 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3804 | |
3805 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); | |
3806 | |
3807 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
3808 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
3809 updated_row = desired_row; | |
3810 | |
3811 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ | |
3812 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
3813 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
3814 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); | |
3815 | |
3816 /* Update the display of the text area. */ | |
3817 update_text_area (w, vpos); | |
3818 | |
3819 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ | |
3820 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
3821 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) | |
3822 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); | |
3823 | |
3824 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ | |
3825 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3826 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3827 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height | |
3828 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p | |
3829 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p | |
3830 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p | |
3831 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p | |
3832 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p | |
3833 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p | |
3834 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) | |
3835 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) | |
3836 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) | |
3837 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); | |
3838 | |
3839 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
3840 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
3841 updated_row = NULL; | |
3842 } | |
3843 | |
3844 | |
3845 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
3846 be called from update_window. */ | |
3847 | |
3848 static void | |
3849 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
3850 struct window *w; | |
3851 { | |
3852 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
3853 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
3854 | |
3855 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
3856 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3857 | |
3858 if ((cursor_in_echo_area | |
3859 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, | |
3860 show the cursor for the message instead of for the | |
3861 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ | |
3862 || (XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w | |
3863 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) | |
3864 && (echo_area_glyphs || STRINGP (echo_area_message)))) | |
3865 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains | |
3866 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
3867 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
3868 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
3869 { | |
3870 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
3871 | |
3872 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
3873 { | |
3874 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
3875 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
3876 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
3877 determine Y. */ | |
3878 struct glyph_row *row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0); | |
3879 int vpos, last_row_vpos; | |
3880 struct glyph_row *last_row = NULL; | |
3881 | |
3882 vpos = 0; | |
3883 while (vpos < w->current_matrix->nrows) | |
3884 { | |
3885 if (row->enabled_p && row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3886 { | |
3887 last_row = row; | |
3888 last_row_vpos = vpos; | |
3889 } | |
3890 ++row; | |
3891 ++vpos; | |
3892 } | |
3893 | |
3894 if (last_row) | |
3895 { | |
3896 cx = last_row->pixel_width; | |
3897 hpos = last_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3898 cy = last_row->y; | |
3899 vpos = last_row_vpos; | |
3900 } | |
3901 } | |
3902 } | |
3903 else | |
3904 { | |
3905 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
3906 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
3907 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3908 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3909 } | |
3910 | |
3911 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
3912 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
3913 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
3914 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
3915 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
3916 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
3917 } | |
3918 | |
3919 | |
3920 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. | |
3921 TOP_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. | |
3922 | |
3923 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
3924 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
3925 O(N) time. | |
3926 | |
3927 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
3928 | |
3929 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
3930 | |
3931 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
3932 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
3933 | |
3934 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
3935 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
3936 | |
3937 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
3938 forward and backward. | |
3939 | |
3940 Value is | |
3941 | |
3942 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
3943 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
3944 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
3945 | |
3946 static int | |
3947 scrolling_window (w, top_line_p) | |
3948 struct window *w; | |
3949 int top_line_p; | |
3950 { | |
3951 struct symbol | |
3952 { | |
3953 /* Number of occurrences of this line in old and new matrix. */ | |
3954 short old_uses, new_uses; | |
3955 | |
3956 /* Vpos of line in new matrix. */ | |
3957 short new_line_number; | |
3958 | |
3959 /* The line itself. */ | |
3960 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3961 | |
3962 /* Hash collision chain. */ | |
3963 struct symbol *next; | |
3964 }; | |
3965 | |
3966 int SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE = 101; | |
3967 struct symbol **table; | |
3968 struct symbol **old_line_syms, **new_line_syms; | |
3969 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; | |
3970 struct symbol *sym; | |
3971 struct run **runs; | |
3972 int nruns; | |
3973 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3974 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
3975 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3976 | |
3977 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
3978 i = top_line_p ? 1 : 0; | |
3979 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
3980 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i) | |
3981 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i) | |
3982 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb | |
3983 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb | |
3984 && row_equal_p (w, | |
3985 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i), | |
3986 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i))) | |
3987 { | |
3988 assign_row (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), | |
3989 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
3990 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3991 ++i; | |
3992 } | |
3993 | |
3994 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
3995 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
3996 return -1; | |
3997 | |
3998 first_old = first_new = i; | |
3999 | |
4000 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4001 desired matrix. */ | |
4002 i = first_new + 1; | |
4003 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4004 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
4005 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4006 ++i; | |
4007 | |
4008 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4009 return 0; | |
4010 | |
4011 last_new = i; | |
4012 | |
4013 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4014 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
4015 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
4016 disabled. */ | |
4017 i = first_old + 1; | |
4018 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4019 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) < yb) | |
4020 ++i; | |
4021 last_old = i; | |
4022 | |
4023 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
4024 i = last_new; | |
4025 j = last_old; | |
4026 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
4027 && j - 1 > first_old | |
4028 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
4029 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
4030 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
4031 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4032 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
4033 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1))) | |
4034 --i, --j; | |
4035 last_new = i; | |
4036 last_old = j; | |
4037 | |
4038 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
4039 if (last_new == first_new) | |
4040 return 0; | |
4041 | |
4042 /* Allocate a hash table in which all rows will be inserted. */ | |
4043 table = (struct symbol **) alloca (SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4044 bzero (table, SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE * sizeof *table); | |
4045 | |
4046 /* For each row in the current matrix, record the symbol belonging | |
4047 to the row in OLD_LINE_SYMS. */ | |
4048 old_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (current_matrix->nrows | |
4049 * sizeof *old_line_syms); | |
4050 new_line_syms = (struct symbol **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows | |
4051 * sizeof *new_line_syms); | |
4052 | |
4053 #define ADDSYM(ROW) \ | |
4054 do \ | |
4055 { \ | |
4056 struct glyph_row *row_ = (ROW); \ | |
4057 int i_ = row_->hash % SYMBOL_TABLE_SIZE; \ | |
4058 sym = table[i_]; \ | |
4059 while (sym && !row_equal_p (w, sym->row, row_)) \ | |
4060 sym = sym->next; \ | |
4061 if (sym == NULL) \ | |
4062 { \ | |
4063 sym = (struct symbol *) alloca (sizeof *sym); \ | |
4064 sym->row = row_; \ | |
4065 sym->old_uses = sym->new_uses = 0; \ | |
4066 sym->next = table[i_]; \ | |
4067 table[i_] = sym; \ | |
4068 } \ | |
4069 } \ | |
4070 while (0) | |
4071 | |
4072 /* Add current rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4073 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) | |
4074 { | |
4075 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4076 { | |
4077 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); | |
4078 old_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4079 ++sym->old_uses; | |
4080 } | |
4081 else | |
4082 old_line_syms[i] = NULL; | |
4083 } | |
4084 | |
4085 /* Add desired rows to the symbol table. */ | |
4086 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
4087 { | |
4088 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4089 ADDSYM (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4090 ++sym->new_uses; | |
4091 new_line_syms[i] = sym; | |
4092 sym->new_line_number = i; | |
4093 } | |
4094 | |
4095 #undef ADDSYM | |
4096 | |
4097 /* Record in runs which moves were found, ordered by pixel | |
4098 height of copied areas. */ | |
4099 nruns = 0; | |
4100 runs = (struct run **) alloca (desired_matrix->nrows * sizeof *runs); | |
4101 | |
4102 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
4103 in both matrices. */ | |
4104 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
4105 if (old_line_syms[i] | |
4106 && old_line_syms[i]->old_uses == 1 | |
4107 && old_line_syms[i]->new_uses == 1) | |
4108 { | |
4109 int j, k; | |
4110 int new_line = old_line_syms[i]->new_line_number; | |
4111 struct run *run = (struct run *) alloca (sizeof *run); | |
4112 | |
4113 /* Record move. */ | |
4114 run->current_vpos = i; | |
4115 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
4116 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
4117 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
4118 run->nrows = 1; | |
4119 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
4120 | |
4121 /* Extend backward. */ | |
4122 j = i - 1; | |
4123 k = new_line - 1; | |
4124 while (j > first_old | |
4125 && k > first_new | |
4126 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4127 { | |
4128 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4129 --run->current_vpos; | |
4130 --run->desired_vpos; | |
4131 ++run->nrows; | |
4132 run->height += h; | |
4133 run->desired_y -= h; | |
4134 run->current_y -= h; | |
4135 --j, --k; | |
4136 } | |
4137 | |
4138 /* Extend forward. */ | |
4139 j = i + 1; | |
4140 k = new_line + 1; | |
4141 while (j < last_old | |
4142 && k < last_new | |
4143 && old_line_syms[j] == new_line_syms[k]) | |
4144 { | |
4145 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4146 ++run->nrows; | |
4147 run->height += h; | |
4148 ++j, ++k; | |
4149 } | |
4150 | |
4151 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
4152 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
4153 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
4154 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
4155 case. */ | |
4156 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
4157 ; | |
4158 for (k = nruns; k >= j; --k) | |
4159 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; | |
4160 runs[j] = run; | |
4161 ++nruns; | |
4162 | |
4163 i += run->nrows; | |
4164 } | |
4165 else | |
4166 ++i; | |
4167 | |
4168 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
4169 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
4170 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
4171 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
4172 | |
4173 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4174 | A | | B | | |
4175 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
4176 | B | | A | | |
4177 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4178 | |
4179 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
4180 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4181 | |
4182 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
4183 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
4184 { | |
4185 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
4186 | |
4187 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
4188 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
4189 { | |
4190 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
4191 | |
4192 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4193 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
4194 { | |
4195 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
4196 | |
4197 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
4198 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
4199 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
4200 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
4201 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
4202 p->nrows = 0; | |
4203 } | |
4204 } | |
4205 | |
4206 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
4207 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
4208 { | |
4209 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
4210 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); | |
4211 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); | |
4212 assign_row (to, from); | |
4213 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
4214 } | |
4215 } | |
4216 | |
4217 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ | |
4218 return 1; | |
4219 } | |
4220 | |
4221 | |
4222 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p TO ON_P for all windows WINDOW in the | |
4223 window tree rooted at W. */ | |
4224 | |
4225 void | |
4226 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) | |
4227 struct window *w; | |
4228 int on_p; | |
4229 { | |
4230 while (w) | |
4231 { | |
4232 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
4233 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); | |
4234 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
4235 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); | |
4236 else | |
4237 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; | |
4238 | |
4239 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
4240 } | |
4241 } | |
4242 | |
4243 | |
4244 | |
4245 /************************************************************************ | |
4246 Frame-Based Updates | |
4247 ************************************************************************/ | |
4248 | |
4249 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
4250 | |
4251 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
4252 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
4253 should not be tried. | |
4254 | |
4255 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
4256 | |
4257 static int | |
4258 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
4259 struct frame *f; | |
4260 int force_p; | |
4261 int inhibit_id_p; | |
4262 { | |
4263 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
4264 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
4265 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
4266 int i; | |
314 | 4267 int pause; |
4268 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
21514 | 4269 extern int input_pending; |
25012 | 4270 |
4271 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
314 | 4272 |
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4273 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4274 calculate_costs (f); |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4275 |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4276 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4277 preempt_count = 1; |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4278 |
314 | 4279 detect_input_pending (); |
25012 | 4280 if (input_pending && !force_p) |
314 | 4281 { |
4282 pause = 1; | |
4283 goto do_pause; | |
4284 } | |
4285 | |
764 | 4286 update_begin (f); |
314 | 4287 |
25012 | 4288 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
314 | 4289 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
25012 | 4290 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4291 |
493 | 4292 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
25012 | 4293 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
4294 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
4295 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
314 | 4296 break; |
4297 | |
4298 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
25012 | 4299 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
4300 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
314 | 4301 |
4302 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
25012 | 4303 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
4304 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
4305 | |
4306 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
4307 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
314 | 4308 { |
25012 | 4309 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4310 { |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4311 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
314 | 4312 { |
4313 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
4314 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
4315 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
4316 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
4317 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
4318 if (outq > 900 | |
4319 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
4320 { | |
4321 fflush (stdout); | |
4322 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
4323 { | |
554 | 4324 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
4325 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
314 | 4326 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
25012 | 4327 * the outq count. */ |
314 | 4328 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
4329 #endif | |
4330 outq *= 10; | |
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4331 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4332 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
314 | 4333 } |
4334 } | |
4335 } | |
4336 | |
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4337 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4338 detect_input_pending (); |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4339 |
25012 | 4340 update_frame_line (f, i); |
314 | 4341 } |
4342 } | |
25012 | 4343 |
764 | 4344 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
314 | 4345 |
4346 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
4347 if (!pause) | |
4348 { | |
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4349 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
25012 | 4350 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4351 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
25012 | 4352 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4353 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4354 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25012 | 4355 && (echo_area_glyphs || STRINGP (echo_area_message)))) |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4356 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
25012 | 4357 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4358 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4359 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
708 | 4360 { |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4361 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4362 int row, col; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4363 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4364 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4365 { |
25012 | 4366 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4367 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4368 row = top; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4369 col = 0; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4370 } |
708 | 4371 else |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4372 { |
25012 | 4373 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4374 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
4375 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
4376 any text on it. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4377 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4378 do |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4379 { |
25012 | 4380 --row; |
4381 col = 0; | |
4382 | |
4383 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
4384 { | |
4385 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
4386 must be ignored here. */ | |
4387 int i; | |
4388 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
4389 row); | |
4390 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4391 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4392 | |
4393 while (last > start | |
4394 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
4395 --last; | |
4396 | |
4397 col = last - start; | |
4398 } | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4399 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4400 while (row > top && col == 0); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4401 |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4402 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4403 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4404 { |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4405 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4406 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4407 { |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4408 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4409 row++; |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4410 } |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4411 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4412 else |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4413 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4414 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4415 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4416 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4417 cursor_to (row, col); |
708 | 4418 } |
314 | 4419 else |
25012 | 4420 { |
4421 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
4422 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
4423 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
4424 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0) | |
4425 { | |
4426 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
4427 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
4428 | |
4429 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
4430 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
4431 | |
4432 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
4433 cursor_to (y, x); | |
4434 } | |
4435 } | |
314 | 4436 } |
4437 | |
764 | 4438 update_end (f); |
314 | 4439 |
4440 if (termscript) | |
4441 fflush (termscript); | |
4442 fflush (stdout); | |
4443 | |
4444 do_pause: | |
4445 | |
4446 display_completed = !pause; | |
25012 | 4447 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
314 | 4448 return pause; |
4449 } | |
4450 | |
25012 | 4451 |
4452 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
314 | 4453 |
21514 | 4454 int |
764 | 4455 scrolling (frame) |
25012 | 4456 struct frame *frame; |
314 | 4457 { |
4458 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
4459 int window_size; | |
4460 int changed_lines; | |
764 | 4461 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
4462 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
4463 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4464 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
314 | 4465 register int i; |
764 | 4466 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
25012 | 4467 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4468 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4469 | |
4470 if (!current_matrix) | |
4471 abort (); | |
4472 | |
4473 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
4474 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
4475 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
314 | 4476 changed_lines = 0; |
4477 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
764 | 4478 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
4479 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
314 | 4480 { |
4481 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
25012 | 4482 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4483 return 0; |
25012 | 4484 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
4485 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4486 { |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4487 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4488 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4489 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4490 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4491 } |
314 | 4492 else |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4493 { |
25012 | 4494 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
4495 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4496 } |
314 | 4497 |
4498 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
4499 { | |
4500 changed_lines++; | |
764 | 4501 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
314 | 4502 } |
4503 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
4504 unchanged_at_top++; | |
25012 | 4505 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
314 | 4506 } |
4507 | |
4508 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
25012 | 4509 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
764 | 4510 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
314 | 4511 return 1; |
4512 | |
764 | 4513 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
314 | 4514 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
4515 | |
4516 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
4517 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
764 | 4518 else if (memory_below_frame) |
314 | 4519 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
4520 | |
4521 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
25012 | 4522 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4523 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
314 | 4524 && (window_size >= |
4525 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
764 | 4526 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4527 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
4528 return 0; | |
4529 | |
25012 | 4530 if (window_size < 2) |
4531 return 0; | |
4532 | |
764 | 4533 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4534 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4535 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
314 | 4536 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
4537 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
4538 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
4539 | |
4540 return 0; | |
4541 } | |
25012 | 4542 |
4543 | |
4544 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
4545 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
4546 | |
4547 static int | |
4548 count_blanks (r, len) | |
4549 struct glyph *r; | |
4550 int len; | |
314 | 4551 { |
25012 | 4552 int i; |
4553 | |
4554 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
4555 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
4556 break; | |
4557 | |
4558 return i; | |
314 | 4559 } |
25012 | 4560 |
4561 | |
4562 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
4563 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
4564 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
314 | 4565 |
4566 static int | |
25012 | 4567 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
4568 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
314 | 4569 { |
25012 | 4570 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
4571 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
4572 | |
4573 while (p1 < end1 | |
4574 && p2 < end2 | |
4575 && GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*p1) == GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*p2)) | |
4576 ++p1, ++p2; | |
4577 | |
4578 return p1 - str1; | |
314 | 4579 } |
4580 | |
25012 | 4581 |
314 | 4582 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
25012 | 4583 |
314 | 4584 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
4585 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
314 | 4586 |
25012 | 4587 |
4588 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
4589 | |
314 | 4590 static void |
25012 | 4591 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
4592 register struct frame *frame; | |
314 | 4593 int vpos; |
4594 { | |
25012 | 4595 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
314 | 4596 int tem; |
4597 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
25012 | 4598 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4599 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4600 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
4601 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
4602 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
4603 | |
4604 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
4605 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
314 | 4606 { |
25012 | 4607 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
4608 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
4609 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
314 | 4610 } |
4611 else | |
25012 | 4612 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
4613 | |
4614 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; | |
4615 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
314 | 4616 { |
25012 | 4617 /* A line that is not enabled is empty. */ |
4618 obody = 0; | |
314 | 4619 olen = 0; |
4620 } | |
4621 else | |
4622 { | |
25012 | 4623 /* A line not empty in the current matrix. */ |
4624 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); | |
4625 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4626 | |
4627 if (! current_row->inverse_p) | |
314 | 4628 { |
25012 | 4629 /* Ignore trailing spaces. */ |
314 | 4630 if (!must_write_spaces) |
25012 | 4631 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
314 | 4632 olen--; |
4633 } | |
4634 else | |
4635 { | |
25012 | 4636 /* For an inverse-video line, remember we gave it spaces all |
4637 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video | |
4638 extends all the way across. */ | |
4639 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
4640 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 4641 } |
4642 } | |
4643 | |
25012 | 4644 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
4645 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4646 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
4647 | |
4648 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
4649 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
314 | 4650 { |
4651 nlen = 0; | |
4652 goto just_erase; | |
4653 } | |
4654 | |
25012 | 4655 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
4656 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4657 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
4658 | |
4659 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
4660 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
4661 { | |
4662 cursor_to (vpos, 0); | |
4663 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); | |
4664 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
4665 clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
4666 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
4667 return; | |
4668 } | |
314 | 4669 |
4670 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
4671 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
25012 | 4672 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 4673 { |
4674 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
25012 | 4675 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
314 | 4676 nlen--; |
4677 } | |
4678 else | |
4679 { | |
25012 | 4680 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
4681 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
4682 all the way across. */ | |
4683 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
4684 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 4685 } |
4686 | |
4687 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
4688 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
4689 { | |
25012 | 4690 int i, j; |
4691 | |
4692 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
4693 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
314 | 4694 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
4695 { | |
25012 | 4696 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
314 | 4697 { |
25012 | 4698 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
4699 j = i + 1; | |
4700 while (j < nlen | |
4701 && (j >= olen | |
4702 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
4703 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
4704 ++j; | |
4705 | |
4706 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
314 | 4707 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
25012 | 4708 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
4709 i = j - 1; | |
314 | 4710 |
4711 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
4712 } | |
4713 } | |
4714 | |
4715 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
4716 if (olen > nlen) | |
4717 { | |
4718 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
4719 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
4720 } | |
4721 | |
25012 | 4722 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
4723 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
314 | 4724 return; |
4725 } | |
4726 | |
25012 | 4727 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
4728 characters in a row. */ | |
4729 | |
314 | 4730 if (!olen) |
4731 { | |
25012 | 4732 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
4733 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
4734 if (must_write_spaces || desired_row->inverse_p) | |
4735 nsp = 0; | |
4736 else | |
4737 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
4738 | |
314 | 4739 if (nlen > nsp) |
4740 { | |
4741 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
4742 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
4743 } | |
4744 | |
764 | 4745 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 4746 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 4747 return; |
4748 } | |
4749 | |
4750 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
25012 | 4751 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
4752 nsp = desired_row->inverse_p ? 0 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
4753 | |
4754 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
4755 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
4756 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
314 | 4757 |
4758 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
4759 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
4760 if (!must_write_spaces && osp + begmatch == olen) | |
4761 { | |
4762 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
25012 | 4763 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
4764 ++begmatch; | |
314 | 4765 } |
4766 | |
4767 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
4768 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
25012 | 4769 when the following text does not match. */ |
314 | 4770 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
4771 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
4772 | |
4773 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
4774 op1 = obody + olen; | |
4775 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
4776 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
25012 | 4777 while (op1 > op2 |
4778 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
314 | 4779 { |
4780 op1--; | |
4781 np1--; | |
4782 } | |
4783 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
4784 | |
4785 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
4786 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
4787 Is it worth it? */ | |
4788 | |
4789 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
4790 if (endmatch && tem | |
764 | 4791 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
314 | 4792 endmatch = 0; |
4793 | |
4794 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
4795 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
4796 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
4797 Is it worth it? */ | |
4798 | |
4799 if (nsp != osp | |
4800 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
764 | 4801 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
314 | 4802 { |
4803 begmatch = 0; | |
4804 endmatch = 0; | |
4805 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
4806 } | |
4807 | |
4808 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
4809 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
4810 | |
4811 if (osp > nsp) | |
4812 { | |
4813 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
4814 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
4815 } | |
4816 else if (nsp > osp) | |
4817 { | |
4818 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
4819 and insert earlier in the line, | |
4820 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
4821 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
4822 { | |
4823 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
4824 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
4825 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
4826 } | |
4827 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
25012 | 4828 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
314 | 4829 } |
4830 olen += nsp - osp; | |
4831 | |
4832 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
4833 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
4834 { | |
4835 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
4836 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
4837 { | |
4838 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
4839 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
4840 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
4841 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
4842 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
314 | 4843 olen = 0; |
4844 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
4845 } | |
4846 else if (nlen > olen) | |
4847 { | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4848 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4849 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4850 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4851 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4852 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4853 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4854 is a padding glyph. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4855 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4856 int del; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4857 |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4858 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
25012 | 4859 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4860 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
25012 | 4861 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4862 del = olen - tem - out; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4863 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4864 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
4865 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
314 | 4866 olen = nlen; |
4867 } | |
4868 else if (olen > nlen) | |
4869 { | |
4870 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
4871 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
4872 olen = nlen; | |
4873 } | |
4874 } | |
4875 | |
4876 just_erase: | |
4877 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
4878 if (olen > nlen) | |
4879 { | |
4880 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
4881 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
4882 } | |
4883 | |
764 | 4884 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 4885 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 4886 } |
25012 | 4887 |
4888 | |
314 | 4889 |
25012 | 4890 /*********************************************************************** |
4891 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
4892 ***********************************************************************/ | |
4893 | |
4894 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
4895 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
4896 boundaries. */ | |
4897 | |
4898 int | |
4899 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
4900 struct window *w; | |
4901 int *x, *y; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
4902 { |
25012 | 4903 struct it it; |
4904 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
4905 struct text_pos startp; | |
4906 int left_area_width; | |
4907 | |
4908 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
4909 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
4910 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
4911 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
4912 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
4913 | |
4914 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
4915 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
4916 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
4917 | |
4918 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
4919 *y = it.current_y; | |
4920 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
4921 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
4922 } | |
4923 | |
4924 | |
4925 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
4926 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
4927 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
4928 the string returned. */ | |
4929 | |
4930 Lisp_Object | |
4931 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
4932 struct window *w; | |
4933 int x, y; | |
4934 int *charpos; | |
4935 { | |
4936 struct glyph_row *row; | |
4937 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
4938 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
4939 int x0; | |
4940 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
4941 | |
4942 /* Only do this for frames under a window system. */ | |
4943 if (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
9650
4295137050dd
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p):
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9572
diff
changeset
|
4944 return Qnil; |
25012 | 4945 |
4946 if (mode_line_p) | |
4947 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
4948 else | |
4949 row = MATRIX_TOP_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
4950 | |
4951 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
4952 { |
25012 | 4953 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
4954 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
4955 and bitmap area width. */ | |
4956 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
4957 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
4958 x += FRAME_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); | |
4959 | |
4960 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
4961 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
4962 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4963 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4964 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
4965 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
4966 { | |
4967 string = glyph->object; | |
4968 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
4969 break; | |
4970 } | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
4971 } |
25012 | 4972 |
4973 return string; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
4974 } |
25012 | 4975 |
4976 | |
4977 /*********************************************************************** | |
4978 Changing Frame Sizes | |
4979 ***********************************************************************/ | |
314 | 4980 |
4981 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
25012 | 4982 |
493 | 4983 SIGTYPE |
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
4984 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
25012 | 4985 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
314 | 4986 { |
4987 int width, height; | |
4988 extern int errno; | |
4989 int old_errno = errno; | |
4990 | |
764 | 4991 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
314 | 4992 |
764 | 4993 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
4994 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
314 | 4995 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
764 | 4996 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
314 | 4997 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
4998 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
4999 | |
5000 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5001 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5002 |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5003 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5004 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5005 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
314 | 5006 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5007 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1); |
314 | 5008 break; |
5009 } | |
5010 } | |
5011 } | |
5012 | |
5013 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5014 errno = old_errno; | |
5015 } | |
5016 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
5017 | |
5018 | |
764 | 5019 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. */ |
314 | 5020 |
21514 | 5021 void |
314 | 5022 do_pending_window_change () |
5023 { | |
5024 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
5025 while (delayed_size_change) | |
5026 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5027 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5028 |
5029 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
5030 | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5031 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5032 { |
25012 | 5033 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5034 |
764 | 5035 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
5036 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
314 | 5037 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5038 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5039 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0); |
314 | 5040 } |
5041 } | |
5042 } | |
5043 | |
5044 | |
764 | 5045 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5046 indicate no change is to take place. |
314 | 5047 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5048 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5049 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5050 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5051 from a signal handler. */ |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5052 |
21514 | 5053 void |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5054 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay) |
25012 | 5055 register struct frame *f; |
21514 | 5056 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay; |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5057 { |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5058 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5059 |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5060 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5061 { |
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5062 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5063 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5064 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5065 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5066 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5067 pretend, delay); |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5068 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5069 else |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5070 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay); |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5071 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5072 |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5073 static void |
25012 | 5074 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay) |
5075 register struct frame *f; | |
11914
b1a014bdd22c
(change_frame_size_1): Declare arg DELAY.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11858
diff
changeset
|
5076 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay; |
314 | 5077 { |
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5078 int new_frame_window_width; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5079 unsigned int total_glyphs; |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5080 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5081 |
314 | 5082 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5083 if (delay) |
314 | 5084 { |
25012 | 5085 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5086 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
314 | 5087 delayed_size_change = 1; |
5088 return; | |
5089 } | |
5090 | |
764 | 5091 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
25012 | 5092 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
5093 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5094 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5095 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5096 if (newheight == 0) |
25012 | 5097 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5098 if (newwidth == 0) |
25012 | 5099 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
5100 | |
5101 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
5102 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
5103 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5104 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5105 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
25012 | 5106 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5107 |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5108 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
25012 | 5109 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
5110 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
314 | 5111 return; |
5112 | |
15078 | 5113 BLOCK_INPUT; |
5114 | |
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5115 #ifdef MSDOS |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5116 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5117 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5118 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5119 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5120 #endif |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5121 |
25012 | 5122 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
314 | 5123 { |
25012 | 5124 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
314 | 5125 { |
25012 | 5126 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
5127 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
5128 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
5129 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
5130 (newheight | |
5131 - 1 | |
5132 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
5133 0); | |
5134 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5135 newheight - 1); |
25012 | 5136 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
314 | 5137 } |
5138 else | |
764 | 5139 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
25012 | 5140 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
5141 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
5142 | |
5143 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5144 FrameRows = newheight; |
314 | 5145 } |
5146 | |
25012 | 5147 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
314 | 5148 { |
25012 | 5149 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
5150 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
5151 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
5152 | |
5153 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
764 | 5154 FrameCols = newwidth; |
25012 | 5155 |
5156 if (WINDOWP (f->toolbar_window)) | |
5157 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->toolbar_window)->width, newwidth); | |
314 | 5158 } |
5159 | |
25012 | 5160 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5161 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
5162 | |
5163 { | |
5164 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
5165 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
5166 | |
5167 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
5168 &text_area_height); | |
5169 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
5170 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
5171 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
5172 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
5173 } | |
5174 | |
5175 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
5176 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
5177 calculate_costs (f); | |
15065 | 5178 |
5179 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5180 |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5181 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5182 |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5183 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
25012 | 5184 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
5185 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5186 |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5187 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
314 | 5188 } |
25012 | 5189 |
5190 | |
314 | 5191 |
25012 | 5192 /*********************************************************************** |
5193 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
5194 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5195 | |
5196 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
5197 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
5198 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
5199 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
5200 (file) | |
5201 Lisp_Object file; | |
5202 { | |
5203 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
5204 termscript = 0; | |
5205 | |
5206 if (! NILP (file)) | |
5207 { | |
5208 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
5209 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
5210 if (termscript == 0) | |
5211 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
5212 } | |
5213 return Qnil; | |
5214 } | |
5215 | |
5216 | |
314 | 5217 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
5218 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
5219 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
5220 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5221 (string) |
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5222 Lisp_Object string; |
314 | 5223 { |
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5224 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5225 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5226 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
314 | 5227 fflush (stdout); |
5228 if (termscript) | |
5229 { | |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5230 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5231 termscript); |
314 | 5232 fflush (termscript); |
5233 } | |
5234 return Qnil; | |
5235 } | |
5236 | |
25012 | 5237 |
314 | 5238 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
5239 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
5240 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
5241 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
5242 (arg) | |
5243 Lisp_Object arg; | |
5244 { | |
493 | 5245 if (!NILP (arg)) |
314 | 5246 { |
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5247 if (noninteractive) |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5248 putchar (07); |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5249 else |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5250 ring_bell (); |
314 | 5251 fflush (stdout); |
5252 } | |
5253 else | |
5254 bitch_at_user (); | |
5255 | |
5256 return Qnil; | |
5257 } | |
5258 | |
21514 | 5259 void |
314 | 5260 bitch_at_user () |
5261 { | |
5262 if (noninteractive) | |
5263 putchar (07); | |
25012 | 5264 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
314 | 5265 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
5266 else | |
5267 ring_bell (); | |
5268 fflush (stdout); | |
5269 } | |
5270 | |
25012 | 5271 |
5272 | |
5273 /*********************************************************************** | |
5274 Sleeping, Waiting | |
5275 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5276 | |
314 | 5277 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5278 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
2648 | 5279 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5280 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5281 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5282 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5283 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5284 (seconds, milliseconds) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5285 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
314 | 5286 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5287 int sec, usec; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5288 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5289 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5290 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5291 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5292 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5293 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5294 | |
5295 #ifdef LISP_FLOAT_TYPE | |
5296 { | |
5297 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5298 sec = (int) duration; | |
5299 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5300 } | |
5301 #else | |
5302 CHECK_NUMBER (seconds, 0); | |
5303 sec = XINT (seconds); | |
5304 #endif | |
314 | 5305 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5306 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5307 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5308 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5309 #endif |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5310 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5311 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5312 if (usec < 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5313 { |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5314 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5315 if (-1000000 < usec) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5316 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5317 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5318 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5319 } |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5320 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5321 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5322 |
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5323 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
314 | 5324 return Qnil; |
5325 | |
650 | 5326 { |
5327 Lisp_Object zero; | |
5328 | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5329 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
650 | 5330 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
5331 } | |
587 | 5332 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5333 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5334 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5335 #if 0 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5336 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
314 | 5337 immediate_quit = 1; |
5338 QUIT; | |
5339 | |
5340 #ifdef VMS | |
5341 sys_sleep (sec); | |
5342 #else /* not VMS */ | |
5343 /* The reason this is done this way | |
5344 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
5345 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
5346 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
554 | 5347 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
5348 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
587 | 5349 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
554 | 5350 |
314 | 5351 while (1) |
5352 { | |
554 | 5353 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
5354 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
5355 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
5356 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
314 | 5357 break; |
5358 } | |
5359 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5360 sleep (sec); | |
5361 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5362 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
5363 | |
5364 immediate_quit = 0; | |
5365 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
5366 | |
5367 return Qnil; | |
5368 } | |
5369 | |
25012 | 5370 |
650 | 5371 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
5372 it does the redisplay. | |
5373 | |
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5374 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5375 waiting for input as well. */ |
650 | 5376 |
5377 Lisp_Object | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5378 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5379 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
314 | 5380 { |
650 | 5381 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
314 | 5382 |
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5383 swallow_events (display); |
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5384 |
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5385 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
314 | 5386 return Qnil; |
650 | 5387 |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5388 if (initial_display) |
314 | 5389 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
5390 | |
673 | 5391 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
5392 return Qt; | |
5393 | |
314 | 5394 #ifdef SIGIO |
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5395 gobble_input (0); |
650 | 5396 #endif |
5397 | |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5398 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
650 | 5399 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
5400 | |
314 | 5401 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
5402 } | |
5403 | |
25012 | 5404 |
650 | 5405 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5406 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
2648 | 5407 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5408 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5409 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5410 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5411 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5412 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
650 | 5413 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
5414 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
5415 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5416 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5417 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
650 | 5418 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5419 int sec, usec; |
650 | 5420 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5421 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5422 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5423 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5424 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5425 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5426 | |
5427 #ifdef LISP_FLOAT_TYPE | |
5428 { | |
5429 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5430 sec = (int) duration; | |
5431 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5432 } | |
5433 #else | |
5434 CHECK_NUMBER (seconds, 0); | |
5435 sec = XINT (seconds); | |
5436 #endif | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5437 |
650 | 5438 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5439 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5440 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
650 | 5441 #endif |
5442 | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5443 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
650 | 5444 } |
25012 | 5445 |
5446 | |
314 | 5447 |
25012 | 5448 /*********************************************************************** |
5449 Other Lisp Functions | |
5450 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5451 | |
5452 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
5453 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
5454 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
5455 add length checks). */ | |
5456 | |
5457 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
5458 | |
5459 | |
5460 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
5461 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
5462 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
5463 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
5464 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
5465 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
5466 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
5467 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
5468 the current state.\n") | |
5469 () | |
5470 { | |
5471 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
5472 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
5473 int n; | |
5474 | |
5475 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5476 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5477 { | |
5478 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
5479 goto changed; | |
5480 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
5481 goto changed; | |
5482 } | |
5483 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
5484 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
5485 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
5486 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
5487 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCONS (tail)->cdr) | |
5488 { | |
5489 buf = XCONS (XCONS (tail)->car)->cdr; | |
5490 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ | |
5491 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5492 continue; | |
5493 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
5494 goto changed; | |
5495 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
5496 goto changed; | |
5497 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
5498 goto changed; | |
5499 } | |
5500 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
5501 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
5502 return Qnil; | |
5503 changed: | |
5504 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
5505 n = 1; | |
5506 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5507 n += 2; | |
5508 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCONS (tail)->cdr) | |
5509 n += 3; | |
5510 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
5511 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
5512 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
5513 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
5514 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
5515 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5516 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5517 { | |
5518 *vecp++ = frame; | |
5519 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
5520 } | |
5521 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCONS (tail)->cdr) | |
5522 { | |
5523 buf = XCONS (XCONS (tail)->car)->cdr; | |
5524 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ | |
5525 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5526 continue; | |
5527 *vecp++ = buf; | |
5528 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
5529 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
5530 } | |
5531 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
5532 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5533 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5534 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5535 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5536 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
5537 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5538 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5539 abort (); | |
5540 return Qt; | |
5541 } | |
5542 | |
5543 | |
5544 | |
5545 /*********************************************************************** | |
5546 Initialization | |
5547 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5548 | |
314 | 5549 char *terminal_type; |
5550 | |
25012 | 5551 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
5552 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
5553 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
314 | 5554 |
21514 | 5555 void |
314 | 5556 init_display () |
5557 { | |
5558 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
5559 extern int display_arg; | |
5560 #endif | |
5561 | |
25012 | 5562 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
5563 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
5564 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
5565 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
5566 | |
314 | 5567 meta_key = 0; |
5568 inverse_video = 0; | |
5569 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
5570 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
5571 | |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5572 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5573 during startup. */ |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5574 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
314 | 5575 |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5576 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5577 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5578 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5579 using the window system. |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
5580 |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5581 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5582 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
314 | 5583 |
5584 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5585 if (! display_arg) |
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5586 { |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5587 char *display; |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5588 #ifdef VMS |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5589 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5590 #else |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5591 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5592 #endif |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5593 |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
5594 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
2364 | 5595 } |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
5596 |
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5597 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5598 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5599 && initialized |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5600 #endif |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
5601 ) |
314 | 5602 { |
5603 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
5604 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
5605 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
5606 #else | |
5607 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
5608 #endif | |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5609 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5610 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
15282 | 5611 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5612 So call tgetent. */ |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5613 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
5614 #endif |
25012 | 5615 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
314 | 5616 return; |
5617 } | |
5618 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
5619 | |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5620 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5621 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5622 { |
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
5623 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5624 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
25012 | 5625 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5626 return; |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5627 } |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5628 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
5629 |
314 | 5630 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
5631 if (! isatty (0)) | |
5632 { | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5633 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
314 | 5634 exit (1); |
5635 } | |
5636 | |
5637 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
5638 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
5639 if (!terminal_type) | |
5640 { | |
5641 #ifdef VMS | |
5642 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
5643 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
5644 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
5645 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
5646 #else | |
5647 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
5648 #endif | |
5649 exit (1); | |
5650 } | |
5651 | |
5652 #ifdef VMS | |
25012 | 5653 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
314 | 5654 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
5655 { | |
5656 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
5657 char *p; | |
5658 | |
5659 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
5660 | |
5661 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
5662 if (isupper (*p)) | |
5663 *p = tolower (*p); | |
5664 | |
5665 terminal_type = new; | |
5666 } | |
25012 | 5667 #endif /* VMS */ |
314 | 5668 |
5669 term_init (terminal_type); | |
25012 | 5670 |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5671 { |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5672 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (selected_frame); |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5673 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (selected_frame); |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5674 |
25012 | 5675 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
5676 | |
5677 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
5678 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
5679 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
5680 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5681 } |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
5682 |
25012 | 5683 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
764 | 5684 calculate_costs (selected_frame); |
314 | 5685 |
5686 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
5687 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
5688 if (initialized) | |
5689 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
5690 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5691 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
25012 | 5692 |
5693 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
5694 if (initialized | |
5695 && !noninteractive | |
5696 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) | |
5697 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); | |
314 | 5698 } |
25012 | 5699 |
5700 | |
314 | 5701 |
25012 | 5702 /*********************************************************************** |
5703 Blinking cursor | |
5704 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5705 | |
5706 DEFUN ("show-cursor", Fshow_cursor, Sshow_cursor, 0, 2, 0, | |
5707 "Change visibility flag of the text cursor of WINDOW.\n\ | |
5708 ON_P nil means toggle the flag. Otherwise, ON_P must be an integer,\n\ | |
5709 and the flag is set according to the value of ON_P. WINDOW nil or\n\ | |
5710 omitted means use the selected window. The new cursor state takes effect\n\ | |
5711 with the next redisplay.") | |
5712 (on_p, window) | |
5713 Lisp_Object on_p, window; | |
5714 { | |
5715 struct window *w; | |
5716 | |
5717 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
5718 output routines. */ | |
5719 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
5720 { | |
5721 if (NILP (window)) | |
5722 window = selected_window; | |
5723 else | |
5724 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
5725 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
5726 | |
5727 if (NILP (on_p)) | |
5728 w->cursor_off_p = !w->cursor_off_p; | |
5729 else | |
5730 { | |
5731 CHECK_NUMBER (on_p, 1); | |
5732 w->cursor_off_p = XINT (on_p) != 0; | |
5733 } | |
5734 } | |
5735 | |
5736 return Qnil; | |
5737 } | |
5738 | |
5739 | |
5740 | |
5741 /*********************************************************************** | |
5742 Initialization | |
5743 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5744 | |
21514 | 5745 void |
314 | 5746 syms_of_display () |
5747 { | |
764 | 5748 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
314 | 5749 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5750 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
314 | 5751 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
5752 defsubr (&Sding); | |
5753 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
5754 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
5755 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
25012 | 5756 defsubr (&Sshow_cursor); |
314 | 5757 |
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
5758 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5759 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5760 |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5761 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5762 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
5763 |
314 | 5764 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
5765 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
314 | 5766 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
5767 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
25012 | 5768 |
314 | 5769 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
764 | 5770 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
314 | 5771 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
25012 | 5772 |
314 | 5773 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
764 | 5774 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
25012 | 5775 |
314 | 5776 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
764 | 5777 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
314 | 5778 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
764 | 5779 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
314 | 5780 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
25012 | 5781 |
314 | 5782 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
5783 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
5784 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
25012 | 5785 |
314 | 5786 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
5787 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
5788 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
25012 | 5789 |
314 | 5790 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
5791 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
25012 | 5792 |
314 | 5793 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
764 | 5794 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
314 | 5795 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
5796 Each element can be:\n\ | |
5797 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
5798 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
5799 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
6857 | 5800 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
314 | 5801 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
5802 | |
5803 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
5804 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
5805 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
5806 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
5807 | |
25012 | 5808 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
5809 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
5810 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
5811 | |
314 | 5812 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
5813 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
5814 if (noninteractive) | |
5815 #endif | |
5816 { | |
5817 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
5818 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
5819 } | |
5820 } |